2009 saturn aura green line hybrid owner …...this manual includes the latest information at the...

Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-9Safety Belts ............................................. 1-11Child Restraints ....................................... 1-30Airbag System ......................................... 1-56Restraint System Check ............................ 1-72

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-9Windows ................................................. 2-14Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-21Mirrors .................................................... 2-35OnStar® System ...................................... 2-36Storage Areas ......................................... 2-39Sunroof .................................................. 2-40

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-19Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-24Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-40Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-54

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-28

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-6Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-37Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-38Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-41Tires ...................................................... 5-42Appearance Care ..................................... 5-74Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-81Electrical System ...................................... 5-82Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-92

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16

Index ................................................................ 1

2009 Saturn AURA Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M

SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, and the name AURA,are registered trademarks of Saturn Corporation.GENERAL MOTORS and GM are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. Saturn reserves the right to makechanges after that time without further notice.

This manual describes features that may or may not beon your specific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning to end to learn aboutthe vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,and words work together to explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en françaisauprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:

Helm IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15934932 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15934932 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15934932 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

IndexTo quickly locate information about the vehicle use theIndex in the back of the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and the page number whereit can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsA circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not dothis” or “Do not let thishappen.”

A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell aboutthings that could hurt you or others if you were to ignorethe warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoidor reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle.

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

Many times, this damage would not be covered by thevehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The noticetells what to do to help avoid the damage.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which usethe same words, CAUTION or Notice.

iii

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see yourowner manual for additional instructions or information.

* : This symbol is shown when you need to see aservice manual for additional instructions or information.

Vehicle Symbol ChartHere are some additional symbols that may be found onthe vehicle and what they mean. For more informationon the symbol, refer to the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Seats ................................................1-2Power Seats ..................................................1-3Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4Heated Seats .................................................1-4Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5Head Restraints .............................................1-8Power Lift Seat ..............................................1-9

Rear Seats .......................................................1-9Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-9

Safety Belts ...................................................1-11Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-11How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-24Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-29Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30

Child Restraints .............................................1-30Older Children ..............................................1-30Infants and Young Children ............................1-34Child Restraint Systems .................................1-38Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) ..................................................1-42

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat Position ....................................1-49

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position ....................................1-52

Airbag System ...............................................1-56Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-58When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-61What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-63How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-63What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? .........................................1-64Passenger Sensing System ............................1-65Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-70Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................1-71Restraint System Check ..................................1-72

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-72Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-73

Section 1 Seats and Restraint System

1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be movedforward or rearward.

1. Lift the bar to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to thedesired position andrelease the bar.

Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seatis locked in place.

1-2

Power Seats

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used tooperate them are located on the outboard side ofthe seats.

To adjust the seat:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding thecontrol forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion bymoving the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion bymoving the rear of the control up or down.

1-3

Manual Lumbar

On vehicles with thisfeature, the handle islocated on the outboardside of the seat.

Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease orincrease lumbar support.

Heated Seats

On vehicles with heatedfront seats, the buttons arelocated on the outboardside of the driver’s and frontpassenger seats.

Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on. Theseat will heat to the high setting. The indicator lightabove the switch will be lit next to the number 2.

Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heatsetting. The indicator light will be lit next to thenumber 1.

Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.

The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition isturned off.

1-4

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If either seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatbacks to be sure theyare locked.

On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the leverused to operate them is located on the outboardside of the seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position, thenrelease the lever to lock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

1-5

To return the seatback to an upright position:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to theseatback and the seatback returns to the uprightposition.

2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the controlused to recline them is located on the outboard sideof the seat behind the power seat control.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the controlrearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of thecontrol forward.

1-6

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle isin motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckleup, your safety belts cannot do their job when youare reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash thebelt could go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

1-7

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraintis at the same height as the top of the occupant’shead. This position reduces the chance of a neck injuryin a crash.

Pull the restraint up toraise it. To lower the headrestraint, press thebutton, located on the topof the seatback, andpush the restraint down.

The rear seat head rests are also adjustable.

1-8

Power Lift Seat

To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom ofthe power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatWith this feature, either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.

Before folding a seatback, make sure the front seat isnot reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold downall the way.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle the safety beltsand return them to their normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

1-9

To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatbackstrap while folding the seatback down. This allowsaccess to the trunk.

To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up andmake sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback tobe sure it is locked in position. Make sure that thesafety belts are properly stowed over the seatback in allthree positions.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properlyattached, or twisted will not provide the protectionneeded in a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that the safetybelts are properly routed and attached, and arenot twisted.

{CAUTION:

If either seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatbacks to be sure theyare locked.

When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in theupright locked position.

1-10

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis section of the manual describes how to usesafety belts properly. It also describes some things notto do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannotbe worn properly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, theinjuries can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or be ejected from thevehicle. You and your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In the same crash, youmight not be, if you are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle thesafety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-27for additional information.In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts. Here is why:You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without safety belts, they could have been badlyhurt or killed.After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

1-11

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seaton wheels.

Put someone on it.

1-12

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-13

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-14

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if Iam wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But your chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted. Andyou can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so theywork with safety belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in acrash — even one that is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-15

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-30 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-34. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safetybelt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and youwould be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

1-16

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forward toomuch, which could increase injury. The shoulderbelt should fit snugly against your body.

1-17


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is tooloose. In a crash, you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

1-18


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckledin the wrong place like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

1-19


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes overan armrest like this. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. Thebelt force would then be applied on the abdomen,not on the pelvic bones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goesunder the armrests.

1-20


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury. Also,the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internal organs like yourliver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.

1-21


A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your bodycould move too far forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. You might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-22


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In acrash, you would not have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, makeit straight so it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

1-23

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehicle have alap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explain how to wear alap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you cansit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulledout all the way, the child restraint locking featuremay be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt goback all the way and start again.Engaging the child restraint locking feature in theright front seating position may affect the passengersensing system. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-65 for more information.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-30.Position the release button on the buckle so that thesafety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,move it to the height that is right for you. Impropershoulder belt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in thissection for instruction on use and important safetyinformation.

1-24

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safetybelt through the latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide thelatch plate up the safety belt webbing when thesafety belt is not in use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loopon the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out ofthe way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

1-25

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterYour vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for thedriver and right front passenger position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the beltis centered on the shoulder. The belt should be awayfrom the face and neck, but not falling off of theshoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness of the safety beltin a crash.

Squeeze the buttons (A)on the sides of the heightadjuster and move theheight adjuster to thedesired position.

After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try tomove it down without squeezing the buttons tomake sure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the frontoutboard occupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of thesafety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of a moderate to severefrontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehiclehas side impact airbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, and probably other newparts for the vehicle’s safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-73.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the beltaway from the neck and head.

1-26

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge ofthe seatback and the interior body to remove theguide from its storage clip.

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the twoedges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

1-27

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn may notprovide the protection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be seriously injured.The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

1-28

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt asdescribed previously in this section. Make surethat the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze thebelt edges together so that the safety belt can beremoved from the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide the guide ontothe clip. Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them inbetween the seatback and the interior body, leavingonly the loop of the elastic cord exposed.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-29

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-30

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with thebooster seat state the weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder beltuntil the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bendat the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder beltrest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, tryusing the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-ShoulderBelt on page 1-24 for more information. If theshoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for thelength of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

• If you have the choice, a child should sit in aposition with a lap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt andget the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below thehips, just touching the top of the thighs. This appliesbelt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen, whichcould cause severe or even fatal internal injuries ina crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” underLap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-24.

According to accident statistics, children and infants aresafer when properly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint system secured in a rearseating position.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-31

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear the same safetybelt. The safety belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only one person at a time.

1-32

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with theshoulder belt behind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulderbelt properly. In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. The child couldmove too far forward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-33

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Never leavechildren unattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adultsand older children, but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Every time infants andyoung children ride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrained properly can strike otherpeople, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

1-34

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Never hold an infant or a child while riding in avehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is not possible to hold itduring a crash. For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-35

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in theright front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraintin a rear seat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

1-36

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of neck and head injury duringa crash, infants need complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is not fully developedand its head weighs so much compared with therest of its body. In a crash, an infant in arear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants should always be secured inrear-facing child restraints.

{CAUTION:

A young child’s hip bones are still so small thatthe vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remainlow on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it maysettle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,young children should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-37

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infantseat (A) provides restraintwith the seating surfaceagainst the back ofthe infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in acrash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing childseat (B) provides restraintfor the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

1-38

Securing an Add-On Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in thevehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions that came withthat child restraint and the instructions in thismanual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraintmust be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-42 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint which may be onthe restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to thismanual. The child restraint instructions are important, soif they are not available, obtain a replacement copyfrom the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can movearound in a collision or sudden stop and injure people inthe vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properly following theinstructions that came with that child restraint.

1-39

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

We recommend that children and child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding ina forward-facing child seat; an older child riding ina booster seat; and children, who are large enough,using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates and the passengerseat is in a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 foradditional information.

1-40

When securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even whenno child is in it.

If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rearseat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place the child restraint, youmay not be able to access certain safety belt assembliesor LATCH anchors for additional passengers or childrestraints.

Configurations for Use ofChild Restraints

A. Child restraintusing LATCH

B. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Occupant prohibitedB. Child restraint

using LATCH

A. Child restraintusing LATCH

B. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

C. Child restraint usingsafety belt or LATCHor occupant usingsafety belt

1-41

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

B. Child restraintusing LATCH

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint during drivingor in a crash. This system is designed to make installationof a child restraint easier. The LATCH system usesanchors in the vehicle and attachments on the childrestraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint isproperly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual. When installing a childrestraint with a top tether, you must also use either thelower anchors or the safety belts to properly securethe child restraint. A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.The child restraint manufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use the child restraint and itsattachments. The following explains how to attach achild restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints havelower anchors and attachments or top tether anchorsand attachments.

1-42

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seatingposition that will accommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraintto the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the childrestraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehiclein order to reduce the forward movement and rotationof the child restraint during driving or in a crash.

1-43

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or adual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers are designed foruse with or without the top tether being attached. Othersrequire the top tether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Askthe child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Rear Seat

1-44

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each rearanchor position has a label, near the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion, showing where theanchors are located. The top tether anchors are located behind the rear seat

on the filler panel.

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without atop tether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 foradditional information.

1-45

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached toanchors, the child restraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, the child could beseriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with the childrestraint and the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Do not attach more than one child restraint to asingle anchor. Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor could cause the anchoror attachment to come loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others could be injured. Toreduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle anyunused safety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them.

CAUTION: (Continued)

1-46


Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rubagainst the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damagethese parts. If necessary, move buckled safetybelts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety beltbuckled. This could damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to itsstowed position, before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraint inthe rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint onpage 1-40. Depending on where you place the childrestraint, you may not be able to access certain safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.

You cannot secure three child restraints using the LATCHanchors in the rear seat at the same time, but you caninstall two of them. If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in the passenger-side position, andinstall the other one either in the driver-side position or inthe center position. Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.

A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors

Make sure to attach the child restraint at the properanchor location.

1-47

This system is designed to make installation of childrestraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not usethe vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’sanchors and child restraint attachments to secure therestraints. Some restraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to thelower anchors. If the child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on

the child restraint to the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.Refer to the child restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the position you are using has an

adjustable headrest or head restraint, raise it.See Head Restraints on page 1-8.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tetheraccording to the child restraint instructionsand the following instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using adual tether, route the tetherover the seatback.

1-48

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts. See Head Restraintson page 1-8.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tetherroute the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts. See Head Restraintson page 1-8.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionWhen securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,study the instructions that came with the child restraint tomake sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-42 for how and where to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in thevehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-42 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1-49

If more than one child restraint needs to be installed inthe rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put theRestraint on page 1-40.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-50

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. When installing aforward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down on the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding theuse of the top tether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42for more information.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safetybelt and let it return to the stowed position. If the toptether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

1-51

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionThis vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place tosecure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-40.

In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing systemwhich is designed to turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-65 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-29 for more information, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 foradditional information.

1-52

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42for how and where to install the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap must beanchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicatoron the passenger airbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-53

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-54

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. When installing aforward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down on the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.


If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint ” under Passenger Sensing System onpage 1-65 for more information.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehiclesafety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

1-55

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger andthe passenger seated directly behind the rightfront passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the wordAIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on themiddle part of the steering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest tothe door.

With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appearalong the headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce the risk of injuryfrom the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash ifyou are not wearing your safety belt — even if youhave airbags. Airbags are designed to work withsafety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbagsare not designed to deploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your only restraint. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61.

Wearing your safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting things inside thevehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

1-56

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you would be if you weresitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear your safety belt,even with airbags. The driver should sit as farback as possible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep againstthe door or side windows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-railairbags.

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system is designedfor them. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly in your vehicle. Toread how, see Older Children on page 1-30 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-34.

1-57

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

1-58

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side. The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and

right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacksclosest to the door.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-59

The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,and second row outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

Do not use seat accessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mounted side impactairbag.

Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle withroof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-60

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s orright front passenger’s head and chest. However, theyare only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict how severe a crash islikely to be in time for the airbags to inflate andhelp restrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagscould inflate at a different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

1-61

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stageairbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-railairbags. See Airbag System on page 1-56.Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned threshold level. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of thevehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intendedto deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbagshould have inflated simply because of the damage to avehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehiclehits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down. For seat-mounted side impact and roof-railairbags, deployment is determined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

1-62

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sends anelectrical signal triggering a release of gas fromthe inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causingthe bag to break out of the cover and deploy. Theinflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbagmodules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there areairbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupant seating positions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,primarily because the occupant’s motion is nottoward those airbags. See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 1-61 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts.

1-63

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated forsome time after they deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbag modules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-63.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing out of the windshield or beingable to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicleshould get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave breathing problems but cannot get out of thevehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or a door. If you experiencebreathing problems following an airbag deployment,you should seek medical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlockthe doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn thehazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, andturn the hazard warning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features.

1-64

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnosticmodule which records information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy onpage 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-16.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbagsystems. Improper service can mean that anairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensing system for theright front passenger position. The passenger airbagstatus indicator will be visible on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,are visible during the system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle froma distance, you may not see the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, either the word ONor OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.

United States Canada

1-65

The passenger sensing system turns off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag under certain conditions. The driverairbags and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors thatare part of the right front passenger seat. The sensorsare designed to detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics, children are safer whenproperly secured in a rear seat in the correct childrestraint for their weight and size.

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facingchild restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,who are large enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.

Secure the rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

1-66

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn offthe right front passenger airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag if:• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.• The system determines that an infant is present

in a rear-facing infant seat.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a child restraint.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat.• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off

of the seat for a period of time.• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a

smaller person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off theright front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbags are off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size is sitting properly inthe right front passenger seat.

When the passenger sensing system has allowed theairbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and staylit to remind you that the airbags are active.

For some children who have outgrown child restraintsand for very small adults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the right front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28for more information, including important safetyinformation.

1-67

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.

3. Remove any additional items from the seat such asblankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directionsprovided by the child restraint manufacturer andrefer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position on page 1-52.

5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn thevehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, tomake sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seat cushion.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 1-8.

6. Restart the vehicle.If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present ina child restraint, secure the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicle and check with yourdealer/retailer.

1-68

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting properly in the seat.

If this happens, use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person and enable the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional material from the seat, suchas blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered onthe seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for two to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

1-69

Additional Factors Affecting SystemOperationSafety belts help keep the passenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, whichhelps the passenger sensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additional informationabout the importance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket orcushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates. We recommendthat you not use seat covers or other aftermarketequipment except when approved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-71 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the system operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger seat orbetween the passenger seat cushion and seatbackmay interfere with the proper operation of thepassenger sensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and theservice manual have information about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 7-15.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned offand the battery is disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. You can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

1-70

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or changeabout the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, height, front end or sidesheet metal, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing or moving any partsof the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headlineror pillar garnish trim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passenger’s position, whichincludes sensors that are part of the passenger’sseat. The passenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also

interfere with the operation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either prevent proper deploymentof the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-65.

If you have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about the location of the airbag sensors,sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

1-71

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, check the safety belt reminder light,safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Tornor frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. SeeSafety Belt Reminders on page 3-27 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of SafetyBelts on page 5-76.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not need regularly scheduledmaintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-28 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbag coverings. If there areany opened or broken airbag covers, have theairbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-63. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

1-72

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in yourvehicle. A damaged restraint system may notproperly protect the person using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspected andany necessary replacements made as soon aspossible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need newsafety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies that were used during anycrash may have been stressed or damaged. See yourdealer/retailer to have the safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was beingused during a crash, you may need new LATCH systemparts.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if thesafety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), wasnot being used at the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if thevehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness lightstays on after the vehicle is started, or while you aredriving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28.

1-73

✍ NOTES

1-74

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ...................................................2-4Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7

Doors and Locks .............................................2-9Door Locks ....................................................2-9Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9Door Ajar Reminder ........................................2-9Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11Lockout Protection ........................................2-12Trunk ..........................................................2-12

Windows ........................................................2-14Power Windows ............................................2-15Sun Visors ...................................................2-17

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-17PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-19PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation .................................................2-19Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21

New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21

Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22Starting the Engine (Automatic Engine

Start/Stop) ................................................2-22Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-26Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-27Parking Brake ..............................................2-29Regenerative Braking ....................................2-30Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-30Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-32Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-34

Mirrors ...........................................................2-35Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-35Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-35Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-36

OnStar® System .............................................2-36Storage Areas ................................................2-39

Glove Box ...................................................2-39Cupholders ..................................................2-39Center Console Storage .................................2-40Convenience Net ..........................................2-40

Sunroof .........................................................2-40

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retaileror qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-7.

2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,try this:

• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too farfrom the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy orsnowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, seeyour dealer/retailer or a qualified technician forservice.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functionswork up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with thisfeature, press to operate the remote start feature.See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additionalinformation.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior lampsturn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabledthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remotelock feedback can be programmed to have the horn chirpand/or the turn signals flash to confirm locking. See“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-48 for more information.

Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.Press K again within five seconds to unlock allremaining doors. The interior lamps turn on and stayon for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedbackcan be programmed to have the horn chirp and/orthe turn signals flash to confirm unlocking. See“UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-48 for moreinformation.

With Remote StartShown, Without Remote

Start Similar

2-4

The high-beam headlamps, parking lamps, andback-up lamps may come on each time K is pressed.See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-48 for additional information.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms thecontent theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-17.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold forabout one second to unlock the trunk. The trunk can beopened with the transmitter when the vehicle speedis less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when the ignition is off.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and releaseto locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three timesand the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.

Press and hold L for about three seconds to initiate thepanic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps andturn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again tocancel the panic alarm.

Programming Transmitters to theVehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle willwork. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased and programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be programmed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle can have up to fourtransmitters programmed to it.

2-5

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWmessage displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT(Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-44 for additional information.

Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touchany of the circuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin objectinserted into the notch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter back together.

2-6

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature thatallows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioningsystems and rear window defogger. When the remotestart system is active and the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, it will automatically regulatethe inside temperature. Normal operation of thesesystems will return after the ignition key is turned toON/RUN.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws may require aperson using remote start to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is lowon fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKEtransmitter functions will have an increased rangeof operation. However, the range may be less while thevehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3 for additionalinformation.

/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if you have remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,then immediately press and hold the transmitter’sremote start button for about four seconds oruntil the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash.The doors will lock.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn onand remain on while the engine is running.

The remote start feature provides two separate startsper ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of enginerunning time, or one start with a time extension.The first start must expire or be canceled to gettwo separate 10 minute starts.

If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has beendriven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is stillrunning, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutesfrom the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.The remote start running time can be extended one timeand only after the first remote start.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insertand turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

2-7

The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,unless a time extension has been done or thevehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch andturned to ON/RUN.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing.

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and pressand release the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF positionand then back to LOCK/OFF.

The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.

After the engine has been started two times, or onetime with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must beturned to ON/RUN using the key before the remotestart procedure can be used again. See IgnitionPositions on page 2-21 for information regarding theignition positions on your vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if anyof the follow occur:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-34.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a timeextension, have already been provided for thatignition cycle.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature areshipped from the factory with the remote start systemenabled. The system may be enabled or disabledthrough the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-48 for additionalinformation.

2-8

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can easily

open the doors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door is locked, the handlewill not open it. You increase the chance ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wear safetybelts properly and lock the doors wheneveryou drive.

• Young children who get into unlocked vehiclesmay be unable to get out. A child can beovercome by extreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking your doors can helpprevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.

To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use thekey in the driver or front passenger door or pressthe lock or unlock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one.

To lock a door from the inside, push the manual lockknob down or use the power door lock switches.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thedriver’s and front passenger’s door.

Press the outboard side of the switch to unlock alldoors. Press the inboard side of the switch to lockall doors.

The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.Rear seat passengers must use the manual lockknob on their doors.

Door Ajar ReminderA chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message willdisplay if one of the doors is not fully closed. Thishappens when the ignition is on and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-44.

2-9

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver to delay the locking of thevehicle. It will not operate with the key in the ignition.See Lockout Protection on page 2-12.

Press the driver power door lock switch or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button once.With the key removed from the ignition and the driverdoor open, the following occurs:

• Three chimes sound to signal the delay.

• All doors will lock and the turn signals flash oncefive seconds after the last door has been closed.

• The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature is enabled.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-48.

If a door is opened before the five seconds has elapsed,the doors do not lock until five seconds after all doorsare closed.

If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lockbutton is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, thedoors lock immediately.

If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlockbutton is pressed, the doors unlock immediately anddo not lock automatically after the doors are closed.

This feature is turned on at the factory but may beturned off through the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-48.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksThe vehicle is programmed to lock all doorsautomatically when the following are met:

• All doors are closed.

• The ignition is on.

• The vehicle is shifted out of (P) Park.

This feature cannot be disabled.

All doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into(P) Park.

The power door unlock function can be programmedthrough prompts displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 3-48.

2-10

Rear Door Security LocksRear door security locks prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from the inside.The rear door security locks are located on the insideedge of each rear door. The rear doors must be openedto access them.

To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle will have one ofthe following:

To use these locks:1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so

the slot is in the horizontal position.2. Close the door.3. Do the same for the other rear door.

To open a rear door when the security lock is on,do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one,the power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear doormanual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn itso the slot is in the vertical position.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

2-11

Lockout ProtectionThis feature prevents the driver door from being lockedusing the power door locks, if the key is left in theignition and a door is open.

Press the power door lock switch to lock all the doorsand then unlock the driver door.

Press and hold the power door lock switch for morethan three seconds to override this feature.

If the key is removed from the ignition, or if the manualdoor lock or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used, the key could still be locked insidethe vehicle. Always remember to take the key with you.

TrunkTo open the trunk from the outside, press the trunkrelease button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

{CAUTION:

Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is drivenwith the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, ortrunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows• Fully open the air outlets on or under the

instrument panel• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting

that brings in only outside air and set the fanspeed to the highest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-33.

2-12

Remote Trunk Release

On vehicles with thisfeature, press the buttonlocated on the driver’s doornear the map pocket toopen the trunk.

The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle isin P (Park).

To close the trunk use the pullstrap located on thetrunk lid.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk releasehandle as a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk as it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk release handle is onlyintended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull therelease handle up to open the trunk from the inside.

2-13

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heat andsuffer permanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

2-14

Power Windows

The power windowswitches are located onthe armrest on the driver’sdoor. In addition, thereis a switch on eachpassenger door.

Express-Down WindowThe driver window has an express-down feature. Thisswitch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the way downand release, to automatically lower.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front ofthe switch momentarily. To raise the window, pulland hold the front of the switch.

Express-Up WindowOn windows with this feature, pull the switch up to thesecond position and release the switch to activatethe express-up feature. To stop the window as it is goingup, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working, the driver power windowwill need to be re-programmed for the express-upfeature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’sbattery before reprogramming.

To program the driver window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, orwhen Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,close all doors.

2. Press and hold the power window switch until thewindow is fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch up until the window isfully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch up for approximatelytwo seconds after the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

2-15

Express Window Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window whenthe express-up is active, the window stops at theobstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.Weather conditions such as severe icing may alsocause the window to auto-reverse. The window returnsto normal operation once the obstruction or conditionis removed.

Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, the window will notreverse automatically. You or others could beinjured and the window could be damaged. Beforeyou use express override, make sure that all peopleand obstructions are clear of the window path.

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the second position. The windowrises for as long as the switch is held. Once theswitch is released, the express mode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on an object inits path. Use care when using the override mode.

Window LockoutThe driver power window controls also include a lockoutbutton.

o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button tostop the rear passengers from using their windowswitches. The driver and front passenger can stilloperate all the windows with the lock on. When the redpart of the switch is visible, you have returned tonormal window operation.

2-16

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the visors. They canalso be removed from the center mount and swung tothe side, to block out glare from the side. The visorsalso have extenders that can be pulled out.

The vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrorslocated on the passenger and driver side visors. A lightturns on when the cover is lifted.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,they do not make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may have acontent theft-deterrentalarm system.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.

The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors areclosed, or 60 seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the transmitter a secondtime while all the doors are closed, the system willarm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 secondsif a door is open. When the open door is closed, thesystem will arm.

The security light, located on the instrument panelcluster, comes on to indicate that arming has beeninitiated. Once the system is armed, the security lightflashes once every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second, thismeans that a door is open.

If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock thevehicle, the alarm will be activated.

If you do not want to arm the content theft system, lockthe vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doorsor with the inside power door lock switches.

The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash ifany door is opened while armed.

2-17

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system, do one of the following:

• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.

• Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stopflashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedTo activate the system if it is armed:

• Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten secondpre-alarm chirp will sound followed by athirty second full alarm of horn and lights.

• Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lightswill immediately sound for thirty seconds.

• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, it will activate the full alarm.

When an alarm event has finished, the system willre-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm:

• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.The system will then re-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.This will also disarm the system.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This willalso disarm the system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock buttonis pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that thecontent theft security system alarm was previouslytriggered.

2-18

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizerThe PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.


1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.





PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder inthe key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armed when the keyis removed from the ignition.

You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.

The security light will come on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someoneis using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle fromstarting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to startthe vehicle will be discouraged because of the highnumber of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does notstart and the security light on the instrument panelcluster comes on, there may be a problem with yourtheft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.

2-19

If the engine still does not start, and the key appearsto be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses onpage 5-83. If the engine still does not start with the otherkey, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer whocan service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacementkey. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.The following procedure is for programming additionalkeys only. If all the currently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retaileror a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If the engine will not start,see your dealer/retailer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK/OFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to theON/RUN position within five seconds of the originalkey being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are tobe programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart your engine ifyou turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,is not working properly and must be serviced byyour dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by thePASS-Key® III+ system at this time.

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

2-20

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast orslow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can begradually increased.

Ignition PositionsThe ignition switch hasfour different positions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must beapplied.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in theignition could cause damage to the switch or breakthe key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all theway in, and turn it only with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.

9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It alsolocks the transmission. The key can only be removedin LOCK/OFF.

2-21

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.If this happens, move the steering wheel from right toleft while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you usethings like the radio and windshield wipers whilethe engine is not running.

R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate theelectrical accessories and to display some instrumentpanel warning lights. The switch will stay in this positionwhile the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able to start the vehicleif the battery is allowed to drain for an extended periodof time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. The ignition switch willreturn to the ON/RUN position for driving.

A warning tone will sound when the driver door isopened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the engine is turned off:• Audio System• Power Windows• Sunroof (if equipped)

These features continue to work up to 10 minutes afterthe ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.

The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof willwork until any door is opened.

The radio continues to work until the driver’s door isopened.

All these features operate when the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Starting the Engine(Automatic Engine Start/Stop)The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for thevehicle to start. To restart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicleis moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicleis stopped.

2-22

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speed goes down as your enginegets warm. Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transmissiongently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in starting theengine and protects components. If the key isturned to the START position, and then releasedwhen the engine begins cranking, the enginecontinues cranking for a few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine does not start andthe key is held in START, cranking stops after15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running. Enginecranking can be stopped by turning the ignitionswitch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods oftime, by returning the key to the START positionimmediately after cranking has ended, can overheatand damage the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,to let the cranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there as you hold the keyin START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down. When theengine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, yourengine might not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

2-23

Automatic Engine Start/Stop

{CAUTION:

Exiting the vehicle, without first shifting intoP (Park), may cause the vehicle to move, you orothers may be injured. Because the vehicle hasthe Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, thevehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off,however, once the brake pedal is released, theengine will start up again.

Shift to P (Park) and turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF, before exiting the vehicle.

The vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop feature.After the engine is started and has reached operatingtemperature, the AUTO STOP feature may causethe engine to turn off when you apply the brakes andcome to a complete stop. When you take your footoff the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal, theengine will start. The engine will continue to run until thenext AUTO STOP.

The AUTO STOP symbol on the tachometer signifiesthat the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. See Auto StopMode on page 3-39 for more information. When thevehicle is turned off, the tachometer will move to OFF.If the driver door is opened while in AUTO STOP mode,a chime will sound.

To restart the engine during the AUTO STOP, releasethe brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal.The engine starts immediately. The vehicle continuesto run until the next stop.

There are several conditions which may prevent anAUTO STOP or cause an AUTO START.

2-24

The Engine Will Remain Running When:• The engine, transmission, or hybrid battery is

not warmed up yet.

• The outside temperature is less than 5°F (−15°C).

• While the A/C is in Normal Mode.

• A/C is in Hybrid Mode and the climate controlsystem is working to cool the vehicle. See AutomaticClimate Control System on page 3-19 for moreinformation.

• Defrost is selected.

• The shift lever is in P (Park), N (Neutral),R (Reverse), I (Intermediate) or L (Low).

• The hybrid battery pack charge is low.

• The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or loadsare high.

• The hood is not fully closed.

The Engine Will Restart When:• The brake pedal is released.

• The accelerator pedal is applied.

• When shifting out of D (Drive) to any other gear.

• If the Hybrid A/C button is selected, the duration ofthe AUTO STOP will depend on the outsidetemperature. This economy mode improves fueleconomy by limiting the effects of the airconditioning. The warmer it is outside, the shorterthe time before the engine is restarted to providecabin cooling.

• The climate control system is turned from Off toNormal A/C or defrost See Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-19 for more information.

• The engine is required to run for either heateror climate control performance. See “AirConditioning Engine Start/Stop” under AutomaticClimate Control System on page 3-19 for moreinformation.

• The hybrid battery pack charge is low and requiresrecharging.

• Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.

2-25

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater can provide easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up in coldweather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heater should be pluggedin at least four hours before starting. Some models mayhave an internal thermostat in the cord which willprevent engine coolant heater operation at temperaturesabove 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The engine coolant heater cord is located nearthe air cleaner box on the passenger side of theengine compartment. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 for more informationon location.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet couldcause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind ofextension cord could overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord intoa properly grounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-dutythree-prong extension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater should remain plugged independs on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer inthe area where you will be parking the vehicle for thebest advice on this.

2-26

Automatic Transmission OperationThe shift lever is located on the console betweenthe seats.

There are several differentpositions for the automatictransmission.

P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is thebest position to use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shiftlever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even when you are on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 2-30.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before startingthe engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmissionshift lock control system. Fully apply the brake pedal, andthen press the shift lever button before shifting fromP (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If youcannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)while maintaining brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-32.

2-27

R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging the transmission, seeIf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 4-21.

N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart the engine when thevehicles is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unless yourfoot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle couldmove very rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drive gearwhile the engine is running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) withthe engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine isnot running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with theautomatic transmission. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more power for passing, andyou are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going above 35 mph (55 km/h), push the acceleratorall the way down.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditionscould result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss ofControl on page 4-13.

2-28

I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without usingthe brakes for slight downgrades. If constant upshiftingor downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills,this position can be used to prevent repetitive shifts.You might choose I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive)when driving on hilly, winding roads, so that there isless shifting between gears.

The engine will not Auto Stop when the shifter is inI (Intermediate). See Starting the Engine (AutomaticEngine Start/Stop) on page 2-22.

L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed morethan I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes.Use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If theshift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission will notshift into L (Low) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehiclein one place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. If youare stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on ahill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake,push down the parkingbrake pedal with your leftfoot. If the ignition is on, thebrake system warning lightwill come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light onpage 3-30.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarilyon the parking brake pedal with your left foot until youfeel the pedal release. If the parking brake is notreleased when you begin to drive, the brake systemwarning light will be on and a chime will sound warningyou that the parking brake is still on.

2-29

The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also appear inthe Driver Information Center (DIC) to remind youto release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-44.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Make surethat the parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Regenerative BrakingRegenerative braking takes some of the energy fromthe moving vehicle and turns it back into electricalenergy. This energy is then stored back into thevehicle’s hybrid battery system, contributing to increasedfuel efficiency.

The system works whenever you take your foot off theaccelerator pedal while the vehicle is moving in aforward gear. This causes the vehicle to slow downmore quickly. It may feel like the brake pedal is beingpressed, even when it is not.

Shifting Into Park

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parkingbrake.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing thebutton on the shift lever while pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave the vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

2-30

Leaving the Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with theengine running. The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with theparking brake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it could overheatand even catch fire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake isfirmly set before leaving it. After moving the shift lever intoP (Park), hold the brake pedal down. Then, see if you canmove the shift lever away from P (Park) without firstpushing the shift lever button.

If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked in P (Park).

Torque LockTorque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts toomuch force on the parking pawl in the transmission.This happens when parking on a hill and shiftingthe transmission into P (Park) is not done properly andthen it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto P (Park). To find out how, see “Shifting IntoP (Park)” listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to bepushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parkingpawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).

2-31

Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lockrelease system. The shift lock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shiftlever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fullyreleased, and

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out ofP (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedalis applied.

The shift lock release is always functional except in thecase of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)battery.

If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.See Jump Starting on page 5-33 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shiftlever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),see your dealer/retailer.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things thatcan burn.

2-32

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness and even death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation

(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow thatmay block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells or sounds strange ordifferent.

• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion ordamage.



• The vehicle’s exhaust system has beenmodified, damaged or improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openings in the vehiclebody from damage or after-marketmodifications that are not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspectedthat exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the engine running inan enclosed area such as a garage or a buildingthat has no fresh air ventilation.

2-33

Running the Vehicle While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Exiting the vehicle, without first shifting intoP (Park), may cause the vehicle to move, and youor others can be seriously injured. Because thevehicle has the Automatic Engine Start/Stopfeature, the vehicle’s engine might seem to beshut off when you come to a complete stop.However, once the brake pedal is released, thevehicle can move. The vehicle’s engine can alsorestart at any time.

Shift to P (Park) and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF,before exiting the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poorventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness and even death.Never run the engine in an enclosed area that hasno fresh air ventilation. For more information,see Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.

Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-30.

2-34

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move itfor a clearer view behind your vehicle.

Adjust the mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps frombehind. Push the tab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom ofthe mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more informationon the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.See OnStar® System on page 2-36 for more informationabout the services OnStar® provides.

Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use asoft towel dampened with water.

Outside Power Mirrors

Controls for the outsidepower mirrors are locatedon the inside of thevehicle near the driver’sside mirror.

Use the selector switch located above the four-waycontrol panel to choose either the left or right outsidemirror. Then press the control pad to move the selectedmirror in the desired direction.

To maximize the viewing area, adjust each mirror to seethe side of your vehicle and the area beside andbehind your vehicle.

2-35

Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorIf the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirroradjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.This feature is controlled by the automatic dimminginside rearview mirror. See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-35 for more information.

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed to make an automaticcall to OnStar Emergency advisors who can requestemergency services be sent to your location. If the keysare locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTARto have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStarHands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar

Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, isavailable on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button tohave an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.

OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Termsand Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance may not be available untilthe owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After thefirst prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly orannual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan isnot selected, the OnStar system and all services,including airbag notification and emergency services,may be deactivated and no longer available. For moreinformation visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.

Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.To check if this vehicle is able to provide the servicesdescribed below, or for a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’sGuide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) oronstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or pressthe OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

2-36

OnStar Services Available with theSafe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) orDriving Directions - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStarsubscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated intothe vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-PaidMinute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutesgood for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also belinked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. ora Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStarOwner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitonstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStaradvisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-Turn NavigationVehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigationsystem can provide voice-guided driving directions.Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisorlocate a business or address and download drivingdirections to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will play through the audio systemspeakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

2-37

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling that uses minutes to accesslocation-based weather, local traffic reports, and stockquotes. Press the phone button and give a fewsimple voice commands to browse through the varioustopics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation. This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.

OnStar Steering Wheel ControlsThis vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can beused to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-82 formore information.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dialnumbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can record and transmit vehicleinformation. This information is automatically sent to anOnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags orAACN system deploy. This information usually includesthe vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,additional information regarding the crash that the vehiclewas involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehiclewas hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sendsOnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provideservices where it is located.

OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in aplace where OnStar has an agreement with a wirelessservice provider for service in that area. OnStar servicealso cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place wherethe wireless service provider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, network capacity and reception whenthe service is needed, and technology that is compatiblewith the OnStar service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, orat all times.

Location information about the vehicle is only availableif the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed andavailable.

2-38

The vehicle must have a working electrical system,including adequate battery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may prevent OnStar from providingOnStar service at any particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to important parts of the vehiclein a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityIncrease the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisorcannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons isred, the system may not be functioning properly.Press the OnStar button and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStar subscription has expired andall services have been deactivated. Press the OnStarbutton to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever to open it.

Cupholders

Two removable cupholders and additional storage areasare located at the rear of the shift lever. Push thebutton and the cover will slide back automatically foraccess. Slide the cover forward and lock into placeto close.

2-39

Pull down the door on the back of the center console touse the rear seat cupholders.

Center Console StorageThere is a center console with two storage areas. Liftthe passenger side lever to access the upper storagetray. Lift the driver side lever to access the lowerstorage area.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located in the rear, to storesmall loads as far forward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof,the switch is located onthe headliner between themap lamps.

The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is inON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 2-22.

2-40

Press the back of the switch and release it to open thesunroof to the vent position. From the vent position, pressand release the back of the switch to express-open thesunroof. To stop the sunroof from express opening, pressthe switch again. If the sunshade is closed, it will openautomatically when the sunroof opens past the ventedposition.

A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof isopened. The deflector will retract when the sunroofis closed.

To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch andhold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop ifthe switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed ifthe vehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of thesliding glass panel, damage will occur and thesunroof may not open or close properly. Alwaysclose the glass panel before closing the sunshade.

Sunshade

The automatic sunshadecontrol is located on theheadliner, betweenthe map lamp controls.

The sunshade can be independently opened or closedwhile the panoramic sunroof is closed. To express-openor express-close the sunshade, press and releasethe control rearward or forward. The sunshadewill retract to the full-open or closed position. To stopthe movement of the sunshade, press the controla second time. To close the sunshade to a particularposition, continue to press the control and releaseit when the desired position is reached.

The sunshade cannot be opened or closed if the vehiclehas an electrical failure.

2-41

✍ NOTES

2-42

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ...................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8Windshield Washer .........................................3-9Cruise Control ..............................................3-10Headlamps ..................................................3-13Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-13Headlamps Off in Park ..................................3-14Delayed Headlamps ......................................3-14Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15Dome Lamps ...............................................3-16Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-16Parade Dimming ...........................................3-16Reading Lamps ............................................3-16Trunk Lamp .................................................3-16

Electric Power Management ...........................3-16Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-17Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-18

Climate Controls ............................................3-19Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-19Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-24Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-25Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-26Trip Odometer ..............................................3-26Tachometer .................................................3-26Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-27Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-28Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-29Charging System Light ..................................3-30Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-30Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-31Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction

Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light ............................................3-32

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-33Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-33Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-34

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-36Security Light ...............................................3-37Cruise Control Light ......................................3-37Highbeam On Light .......................................3-37Fuel Gage ...................................................3-38Auto Stop Mode ...........................................3-39Charge/Assist Gage ......................................3-39Fuel Economy Light ......................................3-40

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-40DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-41DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-44DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-48

Audio System(s) .............................................3-54Setting the Clock ..........................................3-55Radio(s) ......................................................3-56Using an MP3 ..............................................3-65XM Radio Messages .....................................3-71Bluetooth® ...................................................3-72Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-82Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-82Radio Reception ...........................................3-84Backglass Antenna .......................................3-85XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-85Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-85

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-25.D. Windshield Wipers on page 3-8 and Windshield

Washer on page 3-9.E. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.F. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.G. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-15.H. Cruise Control on page 3-10. Driver Information

Center (DIC) on page 3-40.I. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 3-6.

J. Horn on page 3-6.K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-82

(If Equipped).L. Ignition Positions on page 2-21.M. Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-19.N. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.O. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation

on page 2-27.P. Audio System(s) on page 3-54.Q. Glove Box on page 2-39.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this buttonlocated on the instrument panel, to make the front andrear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.

Press | again to turn the flashers off.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt and Telescopic Steering WheelA tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheelbe adjusted.

The lever is located on the left side of the steeringcolumn.

To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down thelever. Then move the steering wheel up or down orbackward or forward into a comfortable position.Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

3-6

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals

53: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

O : Exterior Lamp Control

Flash-to-Pass.

Information for these features is on the pages following.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsAn arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster flashes in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flashto signal a lane change. Hold it there until lane changeis complete.

The lever returns to its starting position when it isreleased.

If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flashrapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could beburned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses on page 5-83.

3-7

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to highbeam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever awayfrom you.

This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if thehigh beam lamps are turned on while the ignition isin ON/RUN.

To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets the high-beam headlamps be used tosignal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.

Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you untilthe high-beam headlamps come on, then releasethe lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side ofthe steering wheel.

Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.

& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Forintermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount ofdelay time varies between wiping cycles due to thedelay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle.As vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiperinterval also increases or decreases.

3-8

x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittentposition, turn the intermittent adjust band with thissymbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longerdelay between wiping cycles. To the left of theadjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom totop, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smallerbars mean the wipers movement is less frequent.Larger bars mean the movement is more frequent.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.

1 (High Speed): For wiping at a high speed.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down for a singlewiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipersstart; then release. The wipers stop after one wipingcycle. Hold the lever down longer, for more wipe cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, installnew blades.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If themotor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear awaythe snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for morethan 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn onautomatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipersare turned off.

Windshield WasherPress the button at the end of the windshield wiperlever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking yourvision.

When the button is released, the washers stop, but thewipers continue to wipe about three times or resumethe previous speed.

3-9

Cruise ControlCruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)or more be maintained without keeping your foot onthe accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannotdrive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use thecruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.On such roads, fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you arenot using cruise, you might hit a button and gointo cruise when you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

The cruise control buttonsare located on the steeringwheel.

3-10

I (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control systemon and off.

RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and toaccelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decreasethe speed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicatorlight on the button comes on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symboldisplays in the instrument panel cluster to show thesystem is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control automatically disengages. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-8. When roadconditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.

Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is set at a desired speed and thenthe brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.But it does not need to be reset. The cruise symbol inthe instrument panel cluster also goes out indicatingcruise is no longer engaged. Once the vehicle speed is25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly press the RES+.

The vehicle returns to the previously set speedand stays there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to increase the vehicle speed whileusing cruise control:

• If the cruise control system is already engaged,press and hold the RES+ button until the desiredspeed is reached, then release it.

• To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts,briefly press the RES+ and then release it.Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

3-11

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged:

• Press and hold the SET− until the desired lowerspeed is reached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pushthe SET−. Each time this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previously set cruisecontrol speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works on hills depends uponthe vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you might have to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’sspeed. When going downhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lowerspeed. When the brakes are applied this ends the cruisecontrol.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to disengage the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruise controldisengages, the cruise symbol in the instrumentpanel cluster goes out.

• Press the I button, to turn off the cruise controlsystem.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased whenthe cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

3-12

Headlamps

The band on the lever on the outboard side of thesteering column operates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the following four positions:

2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parkinglamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps andtaillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automaticallyturns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime,and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillampsat night.

P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn onthe Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, thisposition only works when a vehicle is in the P (Park)position.

To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn theswitch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/onagain. This is a momentary control switch that springsback when released. The Automatic Headlamp Systemalways turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.

Headlamps on ReminderIf the driver’s door is opened and the ignition is turnedoff while leaving the lamps on, a warning chime willsound.

3-13

Headlamps Off in ParkThis feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUNposition and it is dark outside. To turn the headlampsoff when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lightson, turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lampposition.

To turn on the headlamps along with the other lampswhen it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control tothe AUTO or headlamp position.

This function does not work for vehicles first sold inCanada.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlampson for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,then the headlamps automatically turn off.

To override the 20 second delayed headlamp featurewhile it is active turn the turn signal/multifunctionlever up one position and then back to AUTO.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensoron top of the instrument panel that controls the DRL.Do not cover this sensor or the head lamps will beon when they are not needed.

The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps comeon at a reduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The exterior lamps control is in the parking lampsonly position (This applies only to vehicles thatare first sold in Canada).

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The parking brake is released or the vehicle is notin P (Park).

When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lightsare not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control tothe parking lamp position.

The regular headlamp system should be turned onwhen they are needed.

3-14

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlampsystem turns on the headlamps at the normal brightnessalong with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrumentpanel that controls the automatic headlamp system.Do not cover the sensor or the automatic headlampsystem will turn on when it is not needed.

There is a delay in the transition between the daytimeand nighttime operation of the DRL and the automaticheadlamp systems so that driving under bridges orbright overhead street lights does not affect the system.The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will onlybe affected when the light sensor sees a changein lighting lasting longer than this delay.

If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system comes on immediately. Once thevehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute forthe automatic headlamp system to change to DRL ifit is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panelcluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness control is in the full brightposition. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-15.

To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp systemoff, turn the ignition on and set the exterior lightswitch to the off/on position. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must stay in P (Park) forthis function.

The regular headlamps should be used when needed.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe knob with thissymbol is located on theinstrument panel to the leftof the steering column.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brightenor dim the lights.

Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on theinterior lamps.

3-15

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when any door is opened.They turn off after all the doors are closed.

The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning theinstrument panel brightness knob, located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steering column,clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, thedome lamps remain on whether a door is openedor closed.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door isopened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds afterall of the doors have been closed or when the ignitionis turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when theunlock symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignitionto provide light as you exit.

Parade DimmingParade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comeson while the parking lamps are turned on during the day.It prevents the display lights and indicator lights frombeing dim, while the parking lamps are used duringthe day.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with front and rear reading lamps, pressthe lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors areclosed. These lamps come on automatically when anydoor is opened.

Trunk LampThe trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is opened andturns off when the trunk is closed.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.It then adjusts the voltage for best performance andextended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage israised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, the voltage is loweredslightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has avoltmeter gage or a voltage display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), you may see the voltage moveup or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

3-16

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electricalloads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator (alternator) may not bespinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power thatis needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan athigh speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailerloads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’s outputand the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increaseengine idle speed to generate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reduce the power demandsof some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, withoutbeing noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levelsof corrective action, this action may be noticeable tothe driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)message might be displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, orLOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reduce the electrical loadsas much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-44.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThe battery run-down feature is designed to protect thevehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, or domelamp) is left on when the ignition is turned off, thebattery run-down protection system automatically shutsthe lamp off after 20 minutes. This prevents drainingof the battery.

To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:

• Open any door.

• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbutton.

• Press the power door lock switch.

• Press the remote trunk release.

• Turn the lamp that was left on to off and thento on again.

3-17

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectauxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellulartelephone.

There are two accessory power outlets. One accessorypower outlet is inside the center storage console andthe other is located on the center storage console belowthe climate controls.

To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in foran extended period of time while the vehicle is offwill drain the battery. Power is always suppliedto the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipmentwhen not in use and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your retailer for additional informationon the accessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle can damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by the warranty. Do not hangany type of accessory or accessory bracket from theplug because the power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

3-18

Climate Controls

Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehiclecan be automatically controlled with this system.

A. Fan ControlB. Air ConditioningC. RecirculationD. Hybrid Air

Conditioning

E. Rear Window DefoggerF. Air Delivery Mode

ControlG. DisplayH. Temperature Control

Climate Control Influence on HybridOperation and Fuel EconomyThe climate control system is dependent upon othervehicle systems for heat and power input. Certainclimate control settings can lead to higher fuel usageand/or fewer Auto Stops.

The following are climate control settings that usemore fuel:• Normal air conditioning mode.• The defrost mode.• Extreme temperature settings, such as

60°F (15°C) / 90°F (32°C).• High fan speed settings.

To help reduce fuel usage:• Use the full automatic control as described under

Automatic Operation.• Use hybrid air conditioning, instead of the normal

air conditioning.• Select a temperature setting that is higher in hot

weather and lower in cold weather.• Turn off the air conditioning when it is not needed.• Only use defrost to clear the windows.

These suggestions will help to reduce fuel consumption,but may reduce overall comfort.

3-19

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fanspeed knob and the air delivery mode knob to activatethe automatic system. When automatic operation isactive the system controls the inside temperature andair delivery.

Use the steps below to place the entire system infull automatic control:

1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to theAUTO position.The current set temperature displays. When AUTOis selected, the air conditioning operation and airinlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioningcompressor runs while the outside temperature isover about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normallyset to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet canautomatically switch to recirculate inside air tohelp quickly cool down the vehicle.

2. Set the temperature.An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.Press the w or x arrow temperature buttonsto adjust the temperature setting as necessary.If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C) the systemremains at the maximum cooling setting. If thetemperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the systemremains at the maximum heat setting. Choosingeither maximum setting does not cause the vehicleto heat or cool any faster.Do not cover the sensor located on the top of theinstrument panel near the windshield. This sensorregulates air temperature based on the intensityof the sun.Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lowerright side of the climate control faceplate, asthis regulates the inside temperature.To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in coldweather, the system delays turning on the fanuntil warm air is available. The length of delaydepends on the engine coolant temperature.Turning the fan knob overrides this delay andchanges the fan to the selected speed.

3-20

Manual OperationThe air delivery mode or fan speed, can manually beadjusted.

9 (Off): Turns the fan off. Outside air still enters thevehicle. The direction can be changed by changingthe mode position. The temperature can also beadjusted using either the up or down arrow temperaturebuttons.

9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase or decrease thefan speed.

wx Temperature Control: Press to increase ordecrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrumentpanel outlets and the floor outlets, with some air directedto the side window defogger.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, withsome air directed to the side window outlets.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost modes. Information on defogging and defrostingcan be found later in this section.

- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshieldoutlets.

0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog orfrost more quickly. The system automatically controlsthe fan speed if defrost is selected from the AUTOmode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) orwarmer, the air conditioning compressor automaticallyruns to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.The air conditioning indicator light blinks three timesif the compressor is turned off while in this mode.

The engine will not perform Auto Stops when the defrostmode is on.

# (Normal Air Conditioning): Press to turn the airconditioning on and off. A light above the button comeson to show that it is on.

When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,the system runs the air conditioning automatically tocool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.

3-21

While in this mode, the hybrid system does not shut theengine down at complete stops.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hotinside air escape. This reduces the time it takes forthe vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows closedfor the air conditioner to work its best.

On cool, but sunny days while using manual operationof the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warmair to the floor and cooler air to the instrument paneloutlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, press x or wto the desired temperature setting.

In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies theair inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,the system maximizes its performance by usingrecirculation as necessary.

N (Hybrid Air Conditioning): This setting balancesfuel economy and air conditioning comfort. Whenhybrid A/C is used in warm weather, you may noticemore frequent auto stops and the cabin may be warmeras compared to normal air conditioning.

Maximum Air ConditioningOn hot days, open the windows to let hot inside airescape; then close them. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps thesystem to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the C vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select # air conditioning.

4. Select the h recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods of timemay cause the air inside of the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening, after the air inthe vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

Heating: On cold days when using manual operationof the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air tothe floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,press x or w to the desired temperature setting.

To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO andadjust the temperature by pressing x or w.

3-22

When the heater is in use, there might be slight noise orvibration during Auto Stops. This is due to the coolantcirculation pump that continues to circulate heat throughthe system during the engine Auto Stop.

The heater works best if the windows are kept closed.

h (Recirculation): Press to turn on the recirculationmode. An indicator light above the button comes onto show it is on. The recirculation mode recirculates andhelps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It canbe used to prevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle and for maximum air conditioningperformance in hot weather. Only use this mode whenit is needed for comfort.

Press this button to cancel the auto recirculationfeature. Each time the vehicle is started, the systemreverts to the auto recirculation function.

If recirculation is selected while in defrost, defog orfloor mode, the light on the button flashes three timesand then goes out to indicate that this is not allowed.This is to prevent window fogging.

When the weather is cool or damp, operating thesystem in recirculation for extended periods of time cancause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear thefog, select either defog or defrost. Make sure theair conditioning is on. Allow the air conditioning to runautomatically to help dehumidify the air.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger onor off. An indicator light above the button comes onto show that the rear window defogger is on.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If additional warming time is needed, press thebutton again.

If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on oncethe button is pressed.

If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface ofthe outside mirrors also heat when the rear windowdefogger is activated. See Outside Power Mirrorson page 2-35.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp objectto clear the inside rear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.These actions may damage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

3-23

Outlet AdjustmentThere are four main air outlets on the instrument panel.Move the lever located in the center of each outletside-to-side or up and down, to change the direction andamount of airflow in the vehicle. The center thumbwheeldoes not control the main outlets.

Rear Seat Air OutletFor vehicles with this feature, the rear seat air outlet islocated in the center of the instrument panel abovethe two main center outlets.

Use the thumbwheel in the center of the outlet to turnthe airflow on or off.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that canblock the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors asthey could adversely affect the performance ofthe system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to indicate a problem withthe vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of the gages shows theremay be a problem, check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous.

3-24

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,how much fuel the vehicle has used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada Similar

3-25

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far the vehicle has beendriven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers (used in Canada).

This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The digitalodometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it mustbe set to the mileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it must be set at zero anda label must be put on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the new odometer wasinstalled.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how far the vehicle hasbeen driven since the odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed and reset through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-41 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

The tachometer also indicates AUTO STOP. For moreinformation see Auto Stop Mode on page 3-39.

3-26

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is started, a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind the driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.

The driver safety belt lightcomes on and stays on forseveral seconds, thenflashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the driver remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’ssafety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder LightSeveral seconds after the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occursif the passenger airbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-65 for more information.The passenger safety belt light, located on theinstrument panel, comes on and stays on forseveral seconds and then flashes for several more.

This chime and light arerepeated if the passengerremains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither thechime nor the light comes on.

3-27

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag’s electrical system forpossible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicatesthere is an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 1-56.

The airbag readiness lightflashes for a few secondswhen the engine isstarted. If the light doesnot come on then, have itfixed immediately.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started or comes on while driving, itmeans the airbag system might not be workingproperly. The airbags in the vehicle might notinflate in a crash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoid injury, have thevehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbagDriver Information Center (DIC) message can also comeon. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-44for more information.

3-28

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorThe vehicle has a passenger sensing system.See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 forimportant safety information. The instrument panel hasa passenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag statusindicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, for several seconds as a system check. If youare using remote start to start the vehicle from adistance, if equipped, you may not see the systemcheck. Then, after several more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on oroff symbol to let you know the status of the rightfront passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag are enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28for more information, including important safetyinformation.


3-29

Charging System LightThis light comes on brieflywhen the ignition key isturned to START, butthe engine is not running,as a check to show itis working.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stayson, or comes on while driving, there could be aproblem with the charging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can alsoappear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-44for more information. This light could indicate thatthere are problems with a generator drive belt, or thatthere is an electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightThe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part is not working, the other part canstill work and stop the vehicle. For good brakingboth parts need to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspected right away.

{CAUTION:

The brake system might not be working properly ifthe brake system warning light is on. Driving withthe brake system warning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on after the vehicle hasbeen pulled off the road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed for service.


3-30

This light comes on briefly when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN. If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light will then go off.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightalso comes on when the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brake does not fully release.If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released,it means there is a brake problem.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display aBRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-44 for more information.

If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road andstop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push or itmay go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or twotimes, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-28.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light

This light comes on brieflywhile the starting theengine.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by thedealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light will then go off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the lightcomes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safelypossible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the ABS light still stayson, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needsservice. If the regular brake system warning light isnot on, the vehicle still has brakes, but it does not haveantilock brakes. If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does not have antilockbrakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30.

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-44 for allbrake related DIC messages.

3-31

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light

The Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system orthe Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warning light comes onbriefly when the engineis started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by thedealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light goes off.

This light, along with the appropriate Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESCsystem and the TCS are working or are disabled.

If the light comes on and stays on, the TCS andpotentially the ESC system have been disabled.Check the DIC messaging to determine which system isturned off, or not working. If the system is not working,the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer.

When the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited.When the ESC system is disabled, the system does notaid in maintaining vehicle directional control.

If the light comes on and flashes, the TCS or the ESCsystem is actively working. When the LOW TRACTIONmessage appears, the system is limiting wheel spin.When the ESC ACTIVE message appears, the systemis aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.

See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 andTraction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 for moreinformation.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-44 formore information on the messages associated withthis light.

3-32

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light indicates thatthe engine coolanthas overheated or theradiator cooling fan isnot working.

This light comes on briefly when the engine is started.If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by thedealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light goes off.

If the light comes on and the vehicle has been operatingunder normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stopthe vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Cooling System on page 5-22 for more information.

Tire Pressure LightFor vehicles with a tirepressure light, this lightcomes on briefly when theengine is started andprovides information abouttire pressures and theTire Pressure MonitoringSystem.

When the Light is On SteadyThis indicates that one or more of the tires is significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center(DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-44 for more information. Stop andcheck the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire isunderinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires onpage 5-42 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First and Thenis On SteadyThis indicates that there could be a problem with the TirePressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about aminute and stays on steady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignitioncycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-50for more information.

3-33

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine LightA computer system called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makessure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life ofthe vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on whenthe ignition is on, but theengine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comes on and stays on, whilethe engine is running, this indicates that there is anOBD II problem and service is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system beforeany problem is apparent. Heeding the light can preventmore serious damage to the vehicle. This systemassists the service technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with thislight on, after a while, the emission controlsmight not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and the engine might notrun as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications on page 5-3.

This light comes on during a malfunction in one oftwo ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.A misfire increases vehicle emissions and coulddamage the emission control system on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

3-34

The following can prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:• Reduce vehicle speed.• Avoid hard accelerations.• Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stopthe vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn thekey off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine.If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps andsee your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

An emission system malfunction might be corrected bydoing the following:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Fillingthe Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose or missing fuel capallows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A fewdriving trips with the cap properly installed shouldturn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddleof water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.The condition is usually corrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few driving trips should turn thelight off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and may cause: stalling afterstart-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed intogear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, orstumbling on acceleration. These conditions might goaway once the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.See Gasoline Octane on page 5-6.

If none of the above have made the light turn off, haveyour dealer/retailer check the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical problems that might havedeveloped.

3-35

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormight begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things to know to help the vehicle passan inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on with the engine running, or if thekey is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if the battery hasrecently been replaced or if the battery has run down.The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving. Thiscan take several days of routine driving. If this hasbeen done and the vehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, yourdealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure LightIf the vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight stays on afterthe engine is started, orcomes on and a chimesounds while drivingthe vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance candamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

3-36

This indicates that the engine is not receiving enoughoil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have someother oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

This light comes on briefly while turning on the ignitionas a check to show it is working. If it does not comeon with the ignition on, there may be a problem with thebulb. Have it fixed right away.

Security Light

For information regardingthis light and the vehicle’ssecurity system, seeContent Theft-Deterrenton page 2-17.

Cruise Control LightThe cruise control lightcomes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.

Highbeam On LightThis light comes on whenthe high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8for more information.

3-37

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage shows how much fuel the vehicle has left,when the ignition is on. When the indicator nearsempty, a LOW FUEL message appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-44 for more information.The vehicle still has a little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be fueled soon. The arrow on the fuel gagepoints to side of the vehicle with the fuel door.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.These are normal and do not indicate a problem withthe fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicated. For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half the tank’s capacity tofill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when while turning acorner or speeding up.

• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition isturned off.


3-38

Auto Stop Mode

The AUTO STOP indicator on the tachometer shows thatthe engine is stopped and is in the fuel saving mode.

When the ignition key is turned off, the tachometerneedle drops to the OFF indicator.

If the ignition is on, the vehicle is in AUTO STOP, andthe driver’s door is opened, a chime sounds.

Charge/Assist GageThe CHARGE/ASSISTgage displays the charge,into and out of thehybrid battery.

When the gage indicates ASSIST, the electric motorassists for maximum acceleration.

When the gage indicates CHARGE, the electric motoroperates as a generator to perform regenerative brakingwhile decelerating. See Regenerative Braking onpage 2-30 for more information.

The gage also indicates CHARGE when the system isrecharging the hybrid battery.

If the hybrid battery or other hybrid components arevery hot or cold, the CHARGE and ASSIST functionsmay be suspended until the component temperaturesare normal.


3-39

Fuel Economy LightIf enabled, this light comeson briefly when the vehicleis started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

This light comes on to indicate the vehicle is achievingfuel economy at or greater than its rated fuel economy.

Driving habits that improve fuel economy increasethe time that the fuel economy light is on.

This light can be disabled by using the DriverInformation Center (DIC) buttons. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-48 for more information.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).The DIC display gives you the status of many of yourvehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driverpersonalization menu modes and warning/statusmessages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons arelocated on the left side ofthe steering wheel.

INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll throughthe vehicle information mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicleinformation mode displays, select a personalization menumode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.

3-40

Press and hold the information and reset buttons at thesame time for one second, then release the buttonsto enter the personalization menu. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-48 for more information.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC hasdifferent modes which can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed inthe following.

Information Modes

INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll throughthe following vehicle information modes:

Outside Air TemperatureThe outside air temperature will be displayed at thesame time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer.The temperature outside of the vehicle will bedisplayed in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degreesCelsius (°C). The outside air temperature appearson the left side of the DIC display and the odometer, ortrip odometer, appears on the right side of the display.

OdometerPress the information button until the outside airtemperature and the odometer displays. This modeshows the total distance the vehicle has been driven ineither miles (mi) or kilometers (km).

To change the DIC display to English or metric units,see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 3-48.

Trip OdometerPress the information button until the outside airtemperature along with A or B displays. These modesshow the current distance traveled since the lastreset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Both odometers can be used atthe same time.

To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold thereset button for a few seconds while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

3-41

FUEL RANGEPress the information button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This mode shows the remaining distance youcan drive without refueling in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and thefuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel rangeis an average of recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.

MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVGdisplays. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) yourvehicle is getting based on current and past drivingconditions.

To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold thereset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.Average fuel economy is then calculated starting fromthat point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it iscontinually updated each time you drive.

MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INSTdisplays. This mode shows the current fuel economyat a particular moment and changes frequently asdriving conditions change. This mode shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike averagefuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.

Under most coast conditions, 99 MPG (0 L/100KM)displays which means that the electric motor/generatoris on and the engine is not using any fuel. At an idlestop, AUTOSTOP displays which means that the electricmotor/generator is off, the gas engine is off, and theengine is not using any fuel.

AV (Average) SPEEDPress the information button until AV SPEED displays.This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed inmiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold thereset button while AV SPEED is displayed.

3-42

OIL LIFEPress the information button until OIL LIFE displays.The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’sremaining useful life. It shows 100% when the systemis reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oilon a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oillife, additional maintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oilon page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.

COOLANTPress the information button until COOLANT displays.This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolantin either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

Tire PressureOn vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press theinformation button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displaysfor the front tires. Press the information button againuntil LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.

If a low tire pressure condition is detected by thesystem while driving, a message advising you tocheck the tire pressure appears in the display.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-48 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-44 for moreinformation.

3-43

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problem detectedin one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is nolonger present. To acknowledge a message and clear itfrom the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.If the condition is still present, the warning messagecomes back on the next time the vehicle is turnedoff and back on. With most messages, a warning chimesounds when the message displays. Your vehiclemay have other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFFThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is disabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15for more information.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ONThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is enabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15for more information.

BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays, while the ignition is on, whenthe brake fluid level is low. The brake system warninglight on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30 for moreinformation. Have the brake system serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when the life of the engine oilhas expired and it should be changed.

When this message is acknowledged and cleared fromthe display, the engine oil life system must still bereset separately. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 formore information.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has not been fullytightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that itis on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the message off.

CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure inone or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.

3-44

If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop assoon as you can. Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the Tire Loading Informationlabel. See Tires on page 5-42, Loading the Vehicleon page 4-22, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-48. The DIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-41.If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressurewarning light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light onpage 3-33.

CRUISE ENGAGEDThis message displays when the cruise control systemis active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for moreinformation.

DOOR AJARThis message displays if one or more of the vehicle’sdoors are not closed properly. Make sure that thedoor(s) are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engine isdisabled. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCEDThis message displays when the vehicle’s engine poweris reduced. Reduced engine power can affect thevehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction in performance, proceedto your destination. The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle maybe driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVEIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),this message displays and the ESC/TCS light onthe instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC isassisting you with directional control of the vehicle.You may feel or hear the system working and see thismessage displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditionsmay exist when this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. This message may stay on fora few seconds after ESC stops assisting you withdirectional control of the vehicle. This is normal whenthe system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 4-6 and Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 3-32 for more information.

3-45

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFFIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),this message displays and the ESC/TCS light onthe instrument panel cluster comes on solid whenESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32for more information.

HOOD AJARThis message displays if the hood is not fully closed.Make sure that the hood is closed completely.The vehicle will not auto stop when the hood is ajar.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outside air temperatureis cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWThis message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery inthe transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4.

LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See FuelGage on page 3-38, Fuel on page 5-6, and Filling theTank on page 5-8 for more information.

LOW TRACTIONThis message displays and the ESC/TCS light on theinstrument panel cluster flashes when the systemis actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditionsmay exist if this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. This message stays on for afew seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32 formore information.

LOW WASHER FLUIDThis message displays when the vehicle’s windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-30.

POWER STEERINGThis message displays if a problem has been detectedwith the electric power steering. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.

3-46

PUSH PARK PEDALThis message displays if the parking brake is leftengaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for moreinformation.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problem with theairbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

SERVICE ESC(ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL)This message displays and a chime sounds if there hasbeen a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrument panel cluster.This light stays on solid as long as the detected problemremains present. When this message displays, thesystem is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32for more information.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pull offthe road as soon as possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off andthen back on. If this message still stays on or turns

back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retaileras soon as possible.

SERVICE HYBRIDThis message displays if the hybrid components needto be serviced. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTIONThis message displays and a chime sounds when thesystem is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrument panel cluster.This light stays on solid as long as the detected problemremains present. When this message displays, thesystem is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32for more information. Have the system serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SRVC (Service) HILL STARTThis message displays if there is a problem with thehill start assist function. Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

3-47

SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOROn vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS isnot working properly. The tire pressure light alsoflashes and then remains on during the same ignitioncycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-33. Severalconditions may cause this message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation on page 5-51 for moreinformation. If the warning comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the TPMS. See yourdealer/retailer.

TRACTION OFFThis message displays and the ESC/TCS light on theinstrument panel cluster comes on solid when thesystem is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-32for more information.

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Trunk on page 2-12 for moreinformation.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features to a preferred setting.All of the features listed may not be available on yourvehicle. Only the features available will be displayed onthe DIC.

The default settings for the features were set when yourvehicle left the factory, but may have been changedfrom their default state since that time.

To change feature settings, use the following procedure:

Entering Personalization Menu1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.

To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps are turned off.

2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons atthe same time for one second, then release to enterthe personalization menu.If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),only the ECO TELLTALE menu and UNITS menuwill be accessible.

3-48

3. Press the information button to scroll through theavailable personalization menu modes.Press the reset button to scroll through the availablesettings for each mode.If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,the display will go back to the previous informationdisplayed.

Personalization Menu Modes

OIL LIFE RESETWhen this feature is displayed, you can reset the engineoil life system. To reset the system, see Engine OilLife System on page 5-18. See “OIL LIFE” under DICOperation and Displays on page 3-41 for moreinformation.

UNITSThis feature allows you to select the units ofmeasurement in which the DIC will display the vehicleinformation. When UNITS appears on the display, pressand hold the reset button for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): All informationwill be displayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): All information will bedisplayed in metric units.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature,press the information button while the desired setting isdisplayed on the DIC.

LOCK HORNThis feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirpevery time the lock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at least one secondto scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first pressof the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The hornwill still chirp on the second press.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.


3-49

UNLOCK HORNThis feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp onthe first press of the unlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled ordisabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at least one secondto scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.



LIGHT FLASHThis feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorhazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock,unlock, or trunk release buttons on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter are pressed, can be enabledor disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting willnot flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttonson the RKE transmitter are pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lightingwill flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttonson the RKE transmitter are pressed.



3-50

DELAY LOCKThis feature, which delays the actual locking of thevehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAYLOCK appears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ON (default): The doors will not lock until five secondsafter the last door is closed. You can temporarilyoverride delayed locking by pressing the power lockswitch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter a second time.

OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressingthe power lock switch or the lock button on theRKE transmitter.

See Power Door Locks on page 2-9, Delayed Lockingon page 2-10, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-4 for more information.


AUTO UNLK (Unlock)This feature, which allows the vehicle to automaticallyunlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. WhenAUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and holdthe reset button for at least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. Youwill need to manually unlock the doors.

See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10for more information.


3-51

UNLK (Unlock)This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selectedfor the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determineswhen the automatic door unlocking will occur. WhenUNLK appears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key isturned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlockwhen the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10for more information.


EXT (Exterior) LIGHTSThis feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock buttonon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXTLIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold thereset button for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn onwhen the unlock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed.

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn onwhen the unlock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed.



3-52

LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language in whichthe DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears onthe display, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear inEnglish.

FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.

SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.

GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.


ECO TELLTALEThis feature allows you to enable or disable the FuelEconomy Light. When ECO TELLTALE appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ON (default): The fuel economy light comes on whengood fuel efficient driving habits are maintained.

OFF: The fuel economy light will not come on,regardless of how fuel efficient the driving habits are.

See Fuel Economy Light on page 3-40 for moreinformation.

To select a setting and exit out of the personalizationmenu mode, press the information button while thedesired setting is displayed on the DIC.

Exiting Personalization MenuThe personalization menu will be exited when any of thefollowing conditions occur:

• A ten second time period has elapsed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.

3-53

Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehicle has and read thefollowing pages to become familiar with its features.

{CAUTION:

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periodscould cause a crash resulting in injury or death toyou or others. Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access to many audio and nonaudio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,do the following while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with the operation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and presetradio stations.

For more information, see Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communication equipment couldinterfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and could damage them.Follow federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,parking brake, and other functions of your vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system.If that equipment is replaced or additional equipmentis added to your vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).With RAP, the audio system can be played even afterthe ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-22 for more information.

3-54

Setting the ClockTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabsthat you want to change.

4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:

• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.

• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date do one of thefollowing:

• Press ©SEEK or s REV.

• Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automatically display. To see thedate press H while the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press H and then the softkey located below theforward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.

3. Press H again to apply the selected default, orlet the screen time out.

3-55

Radio(s)

The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.

Radio Data System (RDS)The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is availablefor use only on FM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.

In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on andoff. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios withthe Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) featureautomatically adjust the radio volume to compensate forroad and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up orslows down, so that the volume level is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab onthe radio display.

4. Press the softkey under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level of radio volumecompensation. The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Each higher settingallows for more radio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown,Radio with CD (MP3) similar

3-56

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™.

f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.

©SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strongsignal in the selected band.

• To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to goto the previous station and stay there.

• To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for afew seconds until the radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next station. Press ©SEEK again tostop scanning.

• To scan preset stations in the selected band, pressand hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a doublebeep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstored preset. Press ©SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

¨SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strongsignal in the selected band.

• To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to goto the next station and stay there.

• To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for afew seconds until the radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next station. Press ¨SEEK again tostop scanning.

• To scan preset stations in the selected band, pressand hold ¨ SEEK for four seconds until a doublebeep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstored preset. Press ¨ SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

4 (Information): For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA,or RDS features, press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the current FM-RDS or XM station;or CD, MP3, WMA song. Song title information will bedisplayed on the top line of the display while theartist information will be displayed on the bottom line, ifthe information is available during XM, CD, MP3, orWMA playback. When information is not available,“No Info” displays.

3-57

Storing a Radio StationDrivers are encouraged to set up radio station favoriteswhile the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favoritestations using the softkeys, favorites button, and steeringwheel controls. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe stored as favorites using the six softkeys locatedbelow the radio station frequency tabs and by using theradio favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAVto go through up to six pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available per page. Each pageof favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, orXM stations. The current balance/fade and tonesettings are also stored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station and set thebalance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.

2. Press FAV to display the page where to store thestation.

3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beepsounds.

4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be storedas a favorite.

To setup the number of favorites pages:

1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.3. Select the desired number of favorites pages

by pressing the softkey located below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return tothe original main radio screen showing the radiostation frequency tabs and to begin programmingfavorites.

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, andWMA features): If additional information is availablefor the current song being played, Auto Text willautomatically page/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAV presets on theradio display.

To activate Auto Text:1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on theradio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ON tab on the radiodisplay.

If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist informationis longer than what can be displayed, the extrainformation will page every three seconds when AutoText is activated.

3-58

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):The radio may display some or all tones such asBASS, MID, and TREB.

To adjust the tone settings:

1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.

2. Press the softkey below the desired tab, thenturn f to adjust the highlighted setting. Thehighlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressingeither SEEK arrow, or by pressing \ FWD ors REV.

The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position by pressing thesoftkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for morethan two seconds. The radio beeps once and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone andspeaker controls to the middle position by pressing ffor more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.

If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decreasethe treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select presetequalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manualdisplays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,or treble by pressing f.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)To adjust balance or fade:

1. Press f until the speaker control labels display.

2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continuepressing f to highlight the desired tab.

3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting.The highlighted setting can also be adjusted bypressing either SEEK arrow.

On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can alsobe used to adjust the highlighted level.

The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fadeto the middle position by pressing the softkey belowthe BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds.The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone andspeaker controls to the middle position by pressing ffor more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.

3-59

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)

CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT buttonfeature.

To select and find a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display the category labels on theradio display. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desiredcategory tab to immediately tune to the firstXM station associated with that category.

4. To go to the previous or to the next XM stationwithin the selected category, do one of thefollowing:

• Turn f.

• Press the softkeys below the right or left arrowson the radio display.

• Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.

5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAVbutton or BAND button to display the favorites again.

Undesired XM categories can be removed through thesetup menu. To remove an undesired category:

1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.

3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.

4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until thecategory name along with the word Removeddisplays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe softkey under the Add tab when a removed categorydisplays or by pressing the softkey below the RestoreAll tab.

Categories cannot be removed or added while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio MessagesCalibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longercalibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must bereturned to your dealer/retailer for service.

Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®

system has activated. Take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

3-60

XM Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide varietyof programming and commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During yourtrial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online for when you are not inthe vehicle. A service fee is required to receive theXM service. For more information, contact XM atxmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andxmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 3-71 later in thissection for further detail.

Loading a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

Ejecting a CDZ EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is notremoved, after several seconds, the CD automaticallypulls back into the player.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer it stays in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currentlyplaying.

©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track,if more than ten seconds have played. Press andhold or press multiple times to continue movingbackward through the tracks on the CD.

¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and holdor press multiple times to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at areduced volume and the elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Release to resume playing the track.

3-61

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at areduced volume and the elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Release to resume playing the track.

RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,rather than sequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD isplaying. The CD remains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. The CD icon and a messageshowing the track number displays when a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary input device,such as a portable audio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, No Aux Input Device Foundmay display.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio may have the MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disccapability feature. For more information, see Using anMP3 on page 3-65 later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• The CD player is very hot. When the temperaturereturns to normal, the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. When the road becomessmoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• A problem may have occurred while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

3-62

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Care of CDsStore CD(s) in their original cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom ofa CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edgeof the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure thewiping process starts from the center to the edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in theCD player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of theCD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage theCD player.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,the CD player could be damaged. While using theCD player, use only CDs in good condition withoutany label, load one CD at a time, and keep theCD player and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in thissection.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system may have an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate. This isnot an audio output; do not plug the headphone setinto the front auxiliary input jack. An external audiodevice such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliaryinput jack for use as another audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 4-2 for more information on driverdistraction.

3-63

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUXbutton to begin playing audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.Additional volume adjustments may have to be madefrom the portable device if the volume is too quiet ornot loud.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portableaudio device is playing. The portable audio devicecontinues playing until it is stopped or turned off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while aportable audio device is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.

Using the USB PortRadio’s with a USB port can control a USB storagedevice or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.See Using an MP3 on page 3-65 for informationabout how to connect and control a USB storage deviceor an iPod.

USB SupportThe USB connector is located on the front of the radioand uses the USB 2.0 standard.

USB Supported Devices• USB Flash Drives

• Portable USB Hard Drives

• Fifth generation or later iPod

• First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano

• iPod touch

• iPod classic

Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®

for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated usingthe latest iTunes® application. See apple.com/itunes.

3-64

Using an MP3

FormatRadios that have the capability of playing MP3’s canplay .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R orCD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage deviceas well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.

Compressed AudioThe radio can play discs that contain both uncompressedCD audio and MP3 files. If both formats are on the disc,the radio reads all MP3 files first, then the uncompressedCD audio files.

CD-R or CD-RW Supported File andFolder StructureThe radio supports:

• Up to 50 folders.

• Up to 8 folders in depth.

• Up to 50 playlists.

• Up to 255 files.

• Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.

• Files with an .mp3 or.cda file extension.

USB Supported File and Folder StructureThe radio supports:

• Up to 700 folders.

• Up to 8 folders in depth.

• Up to 65,535 files.

• Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.

• Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.

• AAC files stored on an iPod.

• FAT16

• FAT32

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. Files are storedin the root directory when the disc or storage devicedoes not contain folders. Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.

Empty FolderFolders that do not contain files are skipped, and theplayer advances to the next folder that contains files.

3-65

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlistand continues sequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last track of the last playlisthas played, play continues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the first folder andcontinues sequentially through all tracks in eachfolder. When the last track of the last folderhas played, play continues from the first track ofthe first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does notautomatically show the new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen as the default display.The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name that iscontained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not presentin the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file namewithout the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pagesare shortened. The display does not show parts of wordson the last page of text and the extension of thefilename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsCDs that have preprogrammed playlists that werecreated using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or RealJukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there isno playlist editing capability using the radio. Theseplaylists are treated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and arestored on a USB device may be supported by theradio with a USB port.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currentlyplaying.

©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if morethan ten seconds have played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continue moving backwardthrough tracks.

¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and holdor press multiple times to continue moving forwardthrough tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volumeand the elapsed time of the file displays. Releases REV to resume playing.

3-66

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of the file displays.Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Press the softkey belowSc to go to the first track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c Tto go to the first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on aCD in random, rather than sequential order. Touse random, press the softkey under the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays to play songs fromthe current CD in random order. Press the same softkeyagain to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey belowh to have the files played in order by artist oralbum. The player scans the disc to sort the files byartist and album ID3 tag information. It can takeseveral minutes to scan the disc depending on thenumber of files on the disc. The radio may begin playingwhile it is scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing filesin order by artist. The current artist playing is shownon the second line of the display. Once all songs by thatartist are played, the player moves to the next artist inalphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist, press the softkeylocated below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the nextor previous artist in alphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below the arrow tab until thedesired artist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum:

1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab fromthe sort screen.

3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return tothe main music navigator screen.

The album name displays on the second line betweenthe arrows and songs from the current album beginsto play. Once all songs from that album have played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabetical orderon the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the softkeybelow the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.

3-67

Connecting a USB Storage Deviceor iPod®

The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or aUSB storage device.

To connect a USB storage device, connect the deviceto the USB port located on the front of the radio.

To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cablethat came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connectorand connect the other end to the USB port locatedon the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USBconnection works, “OK a disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’sdisplay. The iPod music appears on the radio’s displayand begins playing.

The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle ifthe vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will not charge or drawpower from the vehicle’s battery.

If you have an older iPod model that is not supported,it can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary InputJack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereo cable.See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control a USBStorage Device or iPodThe radio can control a USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs and display songinformation on the radio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

©SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if morethan ten seconds have played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continue moving backwardthrough tracks.

¨SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and holdor press multiple times to continue moving forwardthrough tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releases REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

4 (Information): Press to display additional informationabout the selected track.

3-68

Using Softkeys to Control a USBStorage Device or iPodThe five softkeys below the radio display are used tocontrol the functions listed below.

To use the softkeys:1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display

to display the functions listed below, or press thesoftkey below the function if it is currently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function onit to use that function.

j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause thetrack. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go backto the main display screen on an iPod, or the rootdirectory on a USB storage device.

c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to viewthe contents of the current folder on the USB drive.To browse and select files:

1. Press the softkey below c .2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.

3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there ismore then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selectedfolder.

5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.

To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be usedto navigate in the following order:

• First softkey, first item in the list.

• Second softkey, 20% through the list.

• Third softkey, 40% through the list.

• Fourth softkey, 60% through the list.

• Fifth softkey, 80% through the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press the softkeybelow h to view and select a file on an iPod,using the iPod’s menu system. Files are sorted by:

• Playlists

• Artists

• Albums

• Genres

• Songs

• Composers

3-69

To select files:

1. Press the softkey below h .

2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.

3. Press f to select the desired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.

To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be usedto navigate in the following order:

• First softkey, first item in the list.

• Second softkey, 20% through the list.

• Third softkey, 40% through the list.

• Fourth softkey, 60% through the list.

• Fifth softkey, 80% through the list.

Repeat FunctionalityTo use Repeat:

Press the softkey below " or ' to select betweenRepeat All and Repeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeatall tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat Allis being used. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' torepeat one track. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle FunctionalityTo use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to selectbetween Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs,Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turnshuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press thesoftkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > toshuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > toshuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storagedevice.

3-70

XM Radio MessagesXL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, orany others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver isbeing updated, and no action is required. This processshould take no longer than 30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, butthe vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring andprocessing audio and text data. No action is needed.This message should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently inservice. Tune in to another channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot bereceived with your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel isno longer assigned. Tune to another station. If thisstation was one of the presets, choose another stationfor that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artist information is available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Title Info: No song title information is available atthis time on this channel. The system is workingproperly.

No CAT Info: No category information is available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Information: No text or informational messages areavailable at this time on this channel. The system isworking properly.

CAT Not Found: There are no channels available forthe selected category. The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehiclecould have previously been in another vehicle.For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If this message is receivedafter having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this messagealternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown: If this message is received when tuned tochannel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consultwith your dealer/retailer.

3-71

Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Bluetooth®

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetoothcapable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. The system can be usedwhile the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetooth system can be upto 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteed to work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatible phones.

Voice RecognitionThe Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpretvoice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.The system may not recognize voice commands ifthere is too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the systemresponds indicating when it is waiting for a voicecommand. Wait until the tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and naturalvoice.

Audio SystemWhen using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, soundcomes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakersand over-rides the audio system. Use the audiosystem volume knob, during a call, to change thevolume level. The adjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, aminimum volume level is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on the steering wheel tooperate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See AudioSteering Wheel Controls on page 3-82 for moreinformation.

bg (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,to confirm system information, and to start speechrecognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject acall, or to cancel an operation.

3-72

PairingA Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to thein-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is notconnected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide formore information.

Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle ismoving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically linkswith the first available paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to thein-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need to be completed once,unless changes to the pairing information havebeen made or the phone is deleted.

To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to aDifferent Phone later in this section.

Pairing a Phone1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system

responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructionsand a four digit PIN number. The PIN number willbe used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that willbe paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phonemanufacturers user guide for information onthis process.Locate the device named “General Motors” in the liston the cellular phone and follow the instructions onthe cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number thatwas provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Usea name that best describes the phone. This namewill be used to indicate which phone is connected.The system then confirms the name provided.

6. The system responds with “<Phone name> hasbeen successfully paired” after the pairing processis complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones tobe paired.

3-73

Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followed by a tone.


3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetoothdevices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, thesystem will say “Is connected” after the connectedphone.

Deleting a Paired Phone

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followed by a tone.


3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone todelete followed by a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If thephone name is unknown, use the “List” commandfor a list of all paired phones. The system respondswith “Would you like to delete <phone name>?Yes or No” followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with“Please wait while I search for other phones”.

• If another phone is found, the response will be“<Phone name> is now connected”.

• If another phone is not found, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name TagsThe system can store up to thirty phone numbers asname tags that are shared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The system uses the following commands to store andretrieve phone numbers:

• Store

• Digit Store

• Directory

3-74

Using the Store CommandThe store command allows a phone number to bestored without entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,number please” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone number to be stored atonce with no pauses.

• If the system recognizes the number it respondswith “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phonenumber, it responds with “Store” and repeats thenumber followed by “Please say yes or no”. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. The system will ask for thenumber to be re-entered.

4. After the system stores the phone number,it responds with “Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The nametag is recorded and the system responds with“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not sound correct, say“No” and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” andthe name tag is stored. After the number isstored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store CommandThe digit store command allows a phone number to bestored by entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Pleasesay the first digit to store” followed by a tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system willrepeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until the number to bestored is complete.

• If an unwanted number is recognized by thesystem, say “Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

• To hear all of the numbers recognized by thesystem, say “Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

3-75

4. After the complete number has been entered, say“Store”. The system responds with “Please say thename tag” followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The nametag is recorded and the system responds with“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not sound correct, say“No” and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” andthe name tag is stored. After the number isstored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Directory CommandThe directory command lists all of the name tags storedby the system. To use the directory command:


2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with“Directory” and then plays back all of the storedname tags. When the list is complete, the systemreturns to the main menu.

Deleting Name TagsThe system uses the following commands to deletename tags:

• Delete

• Delete all name tags

Using the Delete CommandThe delete command allows specific name tags to bedeleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,please say the name tag” followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The systemresponds with “Would you like to delete, <nametag>? Please say yes or no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to deletethe name tag. The system responds with “OK,deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please saythe name tag.”

3-76

Using the Delete All Name Tags CommandThe delete all name tags command deletes all storedphone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,if present.

To use the delete all name tags command:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system respondswith “You are about to delete all name tags storedin your phone directory and your route destinationdirectory. Are you sure you want to do this? Pleasesay yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.

• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to themain menu.

Making a CallCalls can be made using the following commands:

• Dial

• Digit Dial

• Call

• Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.

3. Say the entire number without pausing.

• If the system recognizes the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If the system does not recognize the number,it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing” and dials thenumber. If the number is not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for the number to bere-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digitdial using <phone name>, please say the first digitto dial” followed by a tone.

3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Followingeach digit, the system will repeat back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

3-77

4. Continue entering digits until the number to bedialed is complete. After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If an unwanted number is recognized by thesystem, say “Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

• To hear all of the numbers recognized by thesystem, say “Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followedby a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the person to call.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” anddials the number.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the rightname tag, it confirms the name tag followedby a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials the number. If the nametag is not correct, say “No”. The system willask for the name tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person called will be heardthrough the audio speakers.

Using the Re-dial Command1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system

responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system respondswith “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials thelast number called from the connected Bluetoothphone.

Once connected, the person called will be heardthrough the audio speakers.

Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received, the audio systemmutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.

• Press c x to ignore a call.

3-78

Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

• Press bg to answer an incoming call when anothercall is active. The original call is placed on hold.

• Press bg again to return to the original call.

• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the originalcall with no action.

• Press cx to disconnect the current call andswitch to the call on hold.

Three-Way CallingThree-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetoothphone and enabled by the wireless service carrierto work.

1. While on a call press b g . The system respondswith “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number ofthe third party to be called.

4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link allthe callers together.

Ending a Call

Press c x to end a call.

Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can bemuted so that the person on the other end of thecall cannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with“Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Resuming call”.

3-79

Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred between the in-vehicleBluetooth system and the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the Cell PhoneDuring a call with the audio in the vehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with“Transferring call” and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth SystemThe cellular phone must be paired and connected withthe Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.The connection process can take up to two minutes afterthe key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition.

During a call with the audio on the cell phone,press b g for more than two seconds. The audioswitches from the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-ThruVoice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognitioncommands on the cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see if the cell phonesupports this feature. This feature can be used toverbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.



3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,accessing <phone name>”.

• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages willgo through its cycle according to the phone’soperating instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)TonesThe in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers andnumbers stored as name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu driven phone system.Account numbers can be programmed into thephonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.

3-80

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say anumber to send tones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the number itresponds with “OK, Sending Number” and thedial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized thenumber properly, it responds “Dial Number,Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Sending Number” and thedial tones are sent and the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call

1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized the nametag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent and the call continues.

Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted out of the in-vehicleBluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tags in the phonebookand phone pairing information. For information on howto delete this information, see the above sectionson Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

3-81

Other InformationThe Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by theBluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of their respective owners.








Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of thevehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). The radio does not operateif it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

Audio Steering Wheel ControlsVehicles with audiosteering wheel controlscould differ depending onthe vehicle’s options.Some audio controlscan be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decreasethe radio volume.

w / x (Next /Previous): Press to change radiostations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks andnavigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.

3-82

To change radio stations:

• Press and release w or x to go to the next orprevious radio station stored as a preset.

• Press and hold w or x to go to the next orprevious radio station in the selected band with astrong signal.

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and release w or x to go to the next orprevious track.

To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:

1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a songuntil the contents of the current folder display onthe radio display.

2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or downthe list, then press and hold w to play thehighlighted track.

To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:

1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a songuntil the contents of the current folder display onthe radio display.

2. Press and hold x to go back to the previousfolder list.

3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or downthe list.

• To select a folder, press and hold w when thefolder is highlighted.

• To go back further in the folder list, pressand hold x .

c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

bg (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silencethe vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn thesound on.

For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systemspress and hold b g for longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. See OnStar® Systemon page 2-36 and Bluetooth® on page 3-72 for moreinformation.

3-83

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occur duringnormal radio reception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and externalelectronic devices are plugged into the accessorypower outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can cause stationfrequencies to interfere with each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stations boost the powerlevels during the day, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit thatautomatically works to reduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio receptionfrom coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hillscan interfere with satellite radio signals, causingthe sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling orstanding under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, ortunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a periodof time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference with thevehicle’s radio. This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’sbattery, or simply having the phone on. This interferencecauses an increased level of static while listening tothe radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

3-84

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear windowdefogger, located in the rear window. Make sure thatthe inside surface of the rear window is not scratchedand that the lines on the glass are not damaged.If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radio reception, the antennaconnector needs to be properly attached to the poston the glass.

If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached tothe glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FMantenna are not damaged. There is enough spacebetween the grid lines to attach a cellular telephoneantenna without interfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rear window defogger.Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not clear the inside rear window with sharpobjects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting withmetallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof ofthe vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of theXM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. If the radio can be used to change the volumelevel of the chime, press and hold the sixth FAV softkeywith the ignition on and the radio power off. The volumelevel changes between Normal and Loud. The selectedvolume level appears on the radio display.

Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factoryradio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.

3-85

✍ NOTES

3-86

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunk Driving .................................................4-3Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3Braking .........................................................4-4Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................4-6Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8Steering ......................................................4-11Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13Passing .......................................................4-13Loss of Control .............................................4-13

Driving at Night ............................................4-15Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-17Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-17Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-18Winter Driving ..............................................4-19If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow ...................................................4-21Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-22Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-22

Towing ..........................................................4-28Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-28Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-28Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-31

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andthe Vehicle

Driving for Better Fuel EconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are somedriving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.

• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,use cruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limits or drive moreslowly when conditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

• Combine several trips into a single trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Specnumber molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.

• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “always expect theunexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-11.

{CAUTION:

Assume that other road users (pedestrians,bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. In addition:

• Allow enough following distance between youand the driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting ininjury or possible death. These simple defensivedriving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Yourreflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgmentcan be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — or even fatal — collisionif you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving isa global tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, andattentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who was drinkingand driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annualmotor vehicle-related deaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabled is higher than if theperson had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control the vehiclewhile driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. Attimes, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to askmore of those control systems than the tires and road canprovide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

4-3

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30.

Braking action involves perception time and reactiontime. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavement orgravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, oricy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. The brakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes will wear out muchfaster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic following distanceseliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakesare pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. Ifthe engine stops, there will still be some power brakeassist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Oncethe power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

4-4

Antilock Brake System (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and the vehicle begins todrive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motoror clicking noise might be heard while this test is goingon, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem withABS, this warning lightstays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS)Warning Light onpage 3-31.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, asrequired, faster than any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, the computer keepsreceiving updates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to geta foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stoppingdistance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump ormotor might be heard operating and the brake pedalmight be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help more thaneven the very best braking.

4-5

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assistthe driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed inemergency driving conditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brake control module tosupplement the power brake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow downthe vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake controlmodule increases brake pressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedalpulsations or pedal movement during this time is normaland the driver should continue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist featurewill automatically disengage when the brake pedal isreleased or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system which combines antilock brake, traction andstability control systems and helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in most drivingconditions.

When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensurethere are no problems. The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normal and does not meanthere is a problem with the vehicle. The system shouldinitialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCSlight will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICEESC message will be displayed.

For more information, see Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-40.

4-6

This light will flash on theinstrument panel clusterwhen the ESC systemis both on and activated.

The system may be heard or felt while it is working; thisis normal.

When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESCor ESC OFF message is displayed, the system willnot assist the driver in maintaining directional control ofthe vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-44.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system isautomatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started. Toassist the driver with vehicle directional control, especiallyin slippery road conditions, the system should always beleft on. But, ESC can be turned off if needed.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the systembegins to assist the driver maintain directional control ofthe vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage. The cruisecontrol system may be re-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.

The ESC/TCS button islocated on the centerconsole.

The traction control system can be turned off or back onby pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both tractioncontrol and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.

When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTIONOFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, andthe ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driverthat both traction control and ESC are disabled.

4-7

It is recommended to leave the system on for normaldriving conditions, but it may be necessary to turnthe system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt tofree it. It may also be necessary to turn off thesystem when driving in extreme off-road conditionswhere high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-21.

ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines thata problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF andSERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will beon solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled andrequires service. If the problem does not clear afterrestarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-44 formore information.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectthe vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

Traction Control System (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat the front wheels are spinning too much or arebeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system works the front brakes and reduces enginepower by closing the throttle and managing enginespark to limit wheel spin.

This light will flash whenthe traction control systemis limiting wheel spin.

The system may be heard or felt while it is working, butthis is normal.

4-8

If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins tolimit wheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged whenroad conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.

When this light is on solidand either the SERVICETRACTION or TRACTIONOFF message is displayed,the system will not limitwheel spin.

Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-44 for more information.

The Traction Control System is automatically enabledwhenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery road conditions, always leave thesystem enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.

It is recommended to leave the system on for normaldriving conditions, but it may be necessary to turnthe system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt tofree it. It may also be necessary to turn off thesystem when driving in extreme off-road conditionswhere high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-21.

To turn the system off oron, press and release thisbutton located on theinstrument panel.

The DIC will display the appropriate message asdescribed previously when the button is pressed.

4-9

Traction Control OperationTraction control limits wheel spin by reducing enginepower to the wheels (engine speed management)and by applying brakes to each individual wheel(brake-traction control) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabled automaticallywhen the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flashthe ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTIONmessage if it senses either of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. Formore information on the LOW TRACTION message,see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-40.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed tospin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brakewarning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/orSERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, thedifferential could be damaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce enginepower and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively whilethese lights and this message are displayed.

Notice: When traction control is turned off, it ispossible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift withthe front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels donot have traction. Damage caused by misuse of thevehicle is not covered. See your warranty bookfor additional information.

The traction control system may activate on dry orrough roads or under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshiftsof the transmission. When this happens, a reductionin acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibrationmay be heard. This is normal.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. The cruise controlmay be re-engaged when road conditions allow.See Cruise Control on page 3-10.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectthe vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

4-10

SteeringIf the engine stalls while driving, the power steeringassist system will continue to operate until you are able tostop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost becausethe electric power steering system is not functioning, thevehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel inthe stopped position for an extended amount of time, youmay notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.The normal amount of power steering assist should returnshortly after a few normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does not requireregular maintenance. If you suspect steering systemproblems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-44.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tiresand the road surface, the angle at which the curve isbanked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before enteringthe curve, while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

4-11

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot stop in time because there is noroom. That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.It is better to remove as much speed as possiblefrom a collision. Then steer around the problem, to theleft or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turneda full 180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided theobject.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of aroad onto the shoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steerso that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm,(about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on a two-lane road can bedangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect a successful pass.If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

4-13

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s threecontrol systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are notrolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speedor steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid onlythe acceleration skid. If the traction control system isoff, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easingyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready fora second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slowdown and adjust your driving to these conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle control morelimited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting toa lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery untilthe vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow onthe road to make a mirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-14

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day drivingbecause some drivers are likely to be impaired — byalcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles because headlamps can only light upso much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns orcurves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But, as we get older, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

4-15

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicle tractionand affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Alwaysdrive slower in these types of driving conditionsand avoid driving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might notwork as well in a quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or acar/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.Driving through flowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If this happens, youand other vehicle occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be very cautious abouttrying to drive through flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up underyour vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wet weather driving tipsinclude:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-42.

• Turn off cruise control.

4-16

Before Leaving on a Long TripTo prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider havingit serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated torecommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Haveup-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention to your surroundingswhile driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road aheadand to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instrumentsoften.

4-17

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or through mountains is differentthan driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for drivingin these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to alower gear.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get sohot that they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignitionoff is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and they could get so hotthat they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocksarea, winding roads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-18

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet icecan occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain beginsto fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wetice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with saltor sand.

Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerategently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quicklycauses the wheels to spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is even less traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even more.

If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-8, it improves the ability to accelerate on slipperyroads, but slow down and adjust your driving to the roadconditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off thetraction control system to help maintain vehicle motion atlower speeds.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improvesvehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance on any slippery roadand watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur onotherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surfaceof a curve or an overpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.

4-19

Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Staywith the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.

• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from around the base of

your vehicle, especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time to time to be suresnow does not collect there.



• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) onthe side of the vehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on or under theinstrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Control system to a settingthat circulates the air inside the vehicle andset the fan speed to the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in the Index.

For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-33.

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking the exhaust.

4-20

Run the engine for short periods only as needed tokeep warm, but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods asneeded to warm the vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most of the way to save heat.Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feelreally uncomfortable from the cold. Moving aboutto keep warm also helps.

If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and thenwhen you run the engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free thevehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22.

If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help tofree a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s tractionsystem in the Index. If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn the traction system offand use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible and avoid going above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-63.

4-21

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutTurn the steering wheel left and right to clear the areaaround the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stabilitysystem. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does notget the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to betowed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 4-28.

Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the VehicleCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of the vehicle.

4-22

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).

The Tire and Loading Information label lists thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also liststhe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation, seeTires on page 5-42 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-48.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Label Example

4-23

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.

4-24

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

4-25



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


1,000 lbs(453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight

and seating positions. The combined weight ofthe driver, passengers, and cargo shouldnever exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehiclecapacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Example 3

4-26

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside the vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. Ina trunk, put them as far forward as youcan. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so that someof them are above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

4-27

Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off the ground. Consult yourdealer/retailer or a professional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-7.

To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle forrecreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing the vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheelson the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle withtwo wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a deviceknown as a dolly.

Here are some important things to consider beforerecreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicleshave restrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Does the vehicle have the proper towingequipment? See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparingthe vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on aLong Trip on page 4-17.

4-28

Dinghy TowingWhen dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for aboutfive minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with allfour wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent the battery from draining while thevehicle is being towed, remove the followingfuse from the instrument panel fuse block:(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse Blockon page 5-83 for more information.

5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).

7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once thedestination has been reached.

Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded whiletowing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Neverexceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.

4-29

Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear coulddamage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by thewarranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the groundand the front wheels on a dolly.

4-30

To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground anda dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed for towing.

5. Remove the key from the ignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear coulddamage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by thewarranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.

Towing a TrailerThe vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow atrailer.

4-31

✍ NOTES

4-32

Service ............................................................5-3Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of the

Vehicle ......................................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-6

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-6Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-8Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-11

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-12Hood Release ..............................................5-12Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-14Engine Oil ...................................................5-15Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22Cooling System ............................................5-22Engine Coolant .............................................5-23

Pressure Cap ...............................................5-27Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27Engine Overheating .......................................5-28Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-30Brakes ........................................................5-31Battery ........................................................5-32Jump Starting ...............................................5-33

Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-37Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-38

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-38Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................5-38License Plate Lamp ......................................5-40Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-40

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-41Tires ..............................................................5-42

Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-43Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-45Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-48High-Speed Operation ...................................5-49Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-50Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-51

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-54When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-56Buying New Tires .........................................5-56Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-58Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-59Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-60Wheel Replacement ......................................5-61Tire Chains ..................................................5-63If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-64Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................5-65Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage .........5-73

Appearance Care ............................................5-74Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-74Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-75Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ..................................................5-76Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-76Weatherstrips ...............................................5-76Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-77Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-77Finish Care ..................................................5-77

Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-78Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-79Tires ...........................................................5-79Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-80Finish Damage .............................................5-80Underbody Maintenance ................................5-80Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-80

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-81Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-81Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-81

Electrical System ............................................5-82Intermediate Voltage Devices and Wiring ..........5-82Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-82Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-82Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-83Fuses .........................................................5-83Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-83Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-86Rear Compartment Fuse Block .......................5-89

Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-92

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added tothe vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems likeantilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.Some of these accessories could even causemalfunction or damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Damage to vehicle components resulting from theinstallation or use of non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, are not covered under theterms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuineGM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailerand ask for GM Accessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-71.

5-3

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirementsCertain types of automotive applications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteriescontained in remote keyless transmitters, may containperchlorate materials. Special handling may benecessary. For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

Never try to do your own service on hybridcomponents. You can be injured and the vehiclecan be damaged if you try to do your own servicework. Service and repair of these hybridcomponents should only be performed by atrained service technician with the properknowledge and tools.

5-4

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and the vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts, andtools before attempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrong fasteners areused, parts can later break or fall off. You couldbe hurt.

If doing some of your own service work, use the properservice manual. It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manual can. To orderthe proper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-15.

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70.

Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileageand the date of any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 6-15.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofthe VehicleThings added to the outside of the vehicle can affect theairflow around it. This can cause wind noise and canaffect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipmentto the outside of the vehicle.

5-5

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part ofthe proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keepthe engine clean and maintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knocking noise when youdrive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, theengine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use ofgasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7 foradditional information.

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionsStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See the underhoodemission control label. If this fuel is not availablein states adopting California emissions standards, thevehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemight be affected. The malfunction indicator lampcould turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-checktest. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-34.If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailerfor diagnosis. If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

5-6

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to work properly. In mostcases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicleexperiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

For customers who do not use TOP TIER DetergentGasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at everyengine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors.

Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available inyour area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,if they comply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles thatwere not designed for those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT canreduce the life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system could be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.

5-7

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and follow all the instructions onthe pump island. Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel orrefueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials awayfrom fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This is against the lawin some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

5-8

The fuel door is located on the passenger side of thevehicle.

To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge inand release and it will open. To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly

counterclockwise.

5-9

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from thehook on the fuel door.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. This spraycan happen if the tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew thecap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-77.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwiseuntil it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-34.

If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), theCHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel capis not properly installed.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying the stationattendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it might not fitproperly. This can cause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and can damage the fuel tank andemissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-34.

5-10

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in thevehicle. Static electricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor. You can bebadly burned and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.• Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or onany surface other than the ground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the insideof the fill opening before operating the nozzle.Contact should be maintained until the fillingis complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping fuel.

5-11

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up andinjure you even when the engine is not running.Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts andstart a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and otherfluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others couldbe burned. Be careful not to drop or spill thingsthat will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood releasehandle with this symbolon it. It is locatedinside the vehicle tothe left of the steeringcolumn.

5-12

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push thesecondary hood release handle toward the driverside of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood.

4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue toopen to the full position. Before closing the hood,be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower thehood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,then release the hood to latch fully. Check to makesure the hood is closed and repeat the processif necessary.

5-13

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, this is what you see:

5-14

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20.

B. Cooling Fans (Out of view). See Cooling System onpage 5-22.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-23.

F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-31.

G. Battery (Out of view). See Battery on page 5-32.H. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-86.I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-30.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down and check the level.

5-15

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at leastone quart/liter of the recommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-92.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has somuch oil that the oil level gets above the upper markthat shows the proper operating range, the enginecould be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-14 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the properoperating range. Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen you are through.

5-16

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• GM6094MUse only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers onan oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Donot use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting theserequirements should havethe starburst symbol onthe container. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, where the temperaturefalls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provideeasier cold starting for the engine at extremely lowtemperatures. Always use an oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of EngineOil to Use” for more information.

5-17

Engine Oil Additives / Engine OilFlushesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all that is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are not recommended andcould cause engine damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer system that indicates whento change the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-44. Changethe oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system might not indicate thatan oil change is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who willperform this work using genuine parts and reset thesystem. It is also important to check the oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

5-18

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changethe engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Wheneverthe oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil and filter, the system mustbe reset. To reset the oil life system:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal threetimes within five seconds.If the message is not displayed, the system is reset.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

5-19

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 forthe location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If youare driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filterat each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter fromthe vehicle and lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, anew filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.

5-20

3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.

5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim ofthe top cover into the bottom hinges and turn thecover down to close it.

6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover isproperly seated.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter offcan cause you or others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stopflames if the engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into the engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.

5-21

Automatic Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to thedealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmissionfluid may damage the vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.Always use the automatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engine to maintain thecorrect working temperature.

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Engine Coolant Surge TankC. Pressure Cap

5-22

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, youcan be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you runthe engine, it could lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® cancause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant couldrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the cooling system and how tocheck and add coolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 5-28.

5-23

What to Use

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling system canbe dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning systemis set for the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, the engine could gettoo hot but you would not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing elseneeds to be added. This mixture:

• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),outside temperature.

• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),engine temperature.

• Protects against rust and corrosion.

• Will not damage aluminum parts.

• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, theengine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Too much water in the mixture canfreeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core,and other parts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are usedin the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in this manual for thecooling system. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

5-24

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a level surface when checkingthe coolant level.

Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recoverytank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant recovery tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done. See Engine Coolanton page 5-23 for more information.

The coolant level should be at or above the FULLCOLD mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not, youmay have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol andit will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Donot spill coolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause the engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

5-25

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn the surge tankpressure cap — even a little — they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly tothe radiator, but be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This willallow any pressure still left to be vented outthe discharge hose.

2. Then keep turning thepressure cap slowly,and remove it.

5-26

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,then check to see if the level is below the mark.If the level is below the FULL COLD mark,add additional coolant to bring the level up to themark. Repeat this procedure until the level remainsconstant at the FULL COLD mark for at leastfive minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank might be lower. If the level is lower thanthe FULL COLD mark, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tank until the levelreaches the FULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 formore information on location.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-14 for moreinformation on location.

5-27

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warn of engineoverheating.

There is an engine coolant temperature warning light onthe vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 3-33 for moreinformation.

You may decide not to lift the hood when this warningappears, but instead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicleis parked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating, both fans shouldbe running. If they are not, do not continue to runthe engine and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage from running the enginewithout coolant is not covered by the warranty.

Notice: If the engine catches fire because of beingdriven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming From The EngineCompartment

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn youbadly, even if you just open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steam comingfrom it. Just turn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is nosign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others couldbe badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

5-28

If No Steam Is Coming From TheEngine CompartmentIf an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steamcan be seen or heard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hotwhen the vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign ofsteam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature andto the highest fan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and letthe engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in theoverheat zone or an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drivethe vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in front of you. If thewarning does not come back on, continue to drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park thevehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while parked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

5-29

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will beoperating your vehicle in an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, aLOW WASHER FLUID message displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-44 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-14 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’swindshield washer system and paint.

5-30

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads havebuilt-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warningsound when the brake pads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound can come and go or be heard all thetime the vehicle is moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soonthe brakes will not work well. That could lead to anaccident. When the brake wear warning sound isheard, have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torque specifications inCapacities and Specifications on page 5-92.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign that brake servicemight be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied, with or without thevehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.When parts of the braking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake linings wear down and newones are installed — be sure to get new approvedreplacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balancebetween the front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

5-31

Battery

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas thatcan explode. You can be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting on page 5-33 for tipson working around a battery without getting hurt.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

This vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a 36-volthybrid battery system.

12-Volt BatteryWhen a new standard 12-volt battery is needed, seeyour dealer/retailer for one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label.

36-Volt Battery SystemIf a new 36-volt hybrid battery system is needed, seeyour dealer/retailer.

Vehicle StorageInfrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−) cable, theone that is exposed. This helps keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−) cablefrom the battery or use a battery trickle charger.This helps maintain the charge of the battery over anextended period of time.

Remember to reconnect the battery when ready to drivethe vehicle.

Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system shouldbe serviced only by a qualified facility to avoidbattery system damage. See your dealer/retailer ifservice is needed.

Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over twomonths, the 36-volt hybrid battery can bepermanently damaged.

The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat, inthe trunk. If the vehicle is stored for an extended periodof time, drive the vehicle every two months for abouthalf an hour to keep the 36-volt hybrid battery chargedand in good working condition.

5-32

Jump StartingIf the battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some orall of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to the vehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set theparking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in thejump start procedure. Put an automatic transmissionin P (Park) or a manual transmission in N (Neutral)before setting the parking brake.

5-33

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Always turn off the radioand other accessories when jump starting thevehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations oneach vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal islocated under a red tethered cap on the battery.The negative (–) terminal is located under ablack tethered cap on the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-14 for moreinformation on location. Flip the caps up to accessthe positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

5-34

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight ifyou need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do notneed to add water to the battery installed in yournew vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, besure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Donot get it on you. If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the place with waterand get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure youbadly. Keep your hands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-35

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

5-36

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (–) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the caps over the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminals to their original positions.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, theheadlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncomingdrivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it isrecommended that you take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-37

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-40.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside andcan burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sure to read and followthe instructions on the bulb package.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps

A. Turn Signal LampB. Stoplamp/Taillamp

C. Backup LampD. Sidemarker Lamp

If a stoplamp or a taillamp needs to be replaced, seeyour dealer/retailer.

5-38

To replace a sidemarker lamp, turn signal lamp, or aback-up lamp:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.

2. Remove the convenience net.

3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim andpull the trunk trim straight back.

4. Turn the three wing nuts counterclockwise that holdthe taillamp assembly counterclockwise.

5. Remove the taillamp assembly.

6. Remove the wiring harness from the taillampassembly by lifting the release tab.

7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.

8. Pull the bulb from the socket.

9. Install a new bulb.

10. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.

11. Reinstall the wiring harness and press down on therelease tab.

12. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and turn the threewing nuts clockwise.

13. Reinstall the trunk trim and wing nuts.

5-39

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb:

1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning thetwo screws counterclockwise.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.

5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing itthrough the fascia opening.

6. Turn the two screws that hold the license platelamp clockwise to reinstall.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-up Lamp 921License Plate Lamp and RearSidemarker Lamp 168

Turn Signal Lamp 3156

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact yourdealer/retailer.

5-40

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementInspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

To remove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away fromthe windshield.

2. Push the release button.

3. Slide the blade forward.

4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slideforward to remove.

5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector andmake sure the grooved areas are fully set in thelocked position.

For the proper type and size, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 6-13.

5-41

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your vehicle Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch flexing. You could have an air-outand a serious accident. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-22.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resultingaccident could cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently to maintain therecommended pressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when your vehicle’stires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-48.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at the recommendedpressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have been damaged,replace them.

5-42

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The example below shows a typicalpassenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

5-43

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 5-59.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

5-44

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside thetire pressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-48.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-22.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22.

5-45

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-22.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-48 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-22.

5-46

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-56.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 5-59.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-22.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-22.

5-47

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-22. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

5-48

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated even when they areunder-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) orhigher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causes excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure. You could havea crash and you or others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require inflation pressureadjustment for high speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are such that a vehiclecan be driven at high speeds, make sure the tiresare rated for high speed operation, in excellentcondition, and set to the correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

Set the cold tire inflation pressure to the maximuminflation pressure shown on the tire’s sidewall, or 41 psi(282 kPa), whichever is lower. The tire’s maximumload and inflation pressure is molded on the tire’ssidewall, in small letters, near the rim flange. When youend high-speed driving return the tires to the coldinflation pressure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-48.

5-49

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radioand sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’stires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flashfor approximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-51 foradditional information.

5-50

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operateson a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complieswith RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




Tire Pressure Monitor OperationThis vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driverwhen a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’stires and transmits the tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressurecondition is detected, theTPMS turns on the low tirepressure warning lightlocated on the instrumentpanel cluster.

At the same time a message to check the pressure in aspecific tire appears on the Driver Information Center(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message come on at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels canbe viewed by the driver. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displays seeDIC Operation and Displays on page 3-41 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-44.

5-51

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in coolweather when the vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. This could be an earlyindicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size ofyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they arecold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22, for anexample of the Tire and Loading Information label andits location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-48.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 5-54 and Tires on page 5-42.

Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants coulddamage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by usingan incorrect tire sealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tiresealant available through your dealer/retailer.

Your vehicle, when new, included a factory-installed TireInflator Kit. This kit uses a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damagethe TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit for information regarding the inflator kit materials andinstructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light and MessageThe TPMS will not function properly if one or more of theTPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the low tire warning lightflashes for about one minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage is also displayed. The low tire warning lightand DIC warning message come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected. Some of theconditions that can cause the malfunction light and DICmessage to come on are:

• The TPMS sensor matching process was startedbut not completed or not completed successfullyafter rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction light should go off oncethe TPMS sensor matching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”later in this section.

• One or more TPMS sensors are missing ordamaged. The DIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should go off when the TPMSsensors are installed and the sensor matchingprocess is performed successfully. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

5-52

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match yourvehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.Tires and wheels other than those recommendedfor your vehicle could prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See Buying New Tires onpage 5-56.

• Operating electronic devices or being near facilitiesusing radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMScould cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signala low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC messagecomes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching ProcessEach TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensorsor rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codesneed to be matched to the new tire/wheel location. Thesensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, inthe following order: driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver siderear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’sair pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, donot exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on

the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressureuse the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-styleair pressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match each tire and wheelposition. If it takes longer than two minutes to match anytire and wheel position, the matching process stopsand you need to start over.

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:


2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with theengine off.

3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at thesame time, for about five seconds to start the TPMSlearn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating theTPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.

4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver sidefront turn signal also comes on to indicate thatcorner’s sensor is ready to be learned.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure for abouteight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then allthe turn signals flash one time to confirm the sensoridentification code has been matched to the tire/wheel position.

5-53

6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the passenger side front tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the passenger side rear tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driverside rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound toindicate the tire learning process is done. Turnthe ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learnmode, or if communication with the receiverstops, or if the time limit has expired, turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start overbeginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Tire Inspection and RotationWe recommend that you regularly inspect yourvehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-56for more information.

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achievea uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thiswill ensure that your vehicle continues to performmost like it did when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-56and Wheel Replacement on page 5-61 formore information.

5-54

When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use thecorrect rotation pattern shown here.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-48 and Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-22.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See TirePressure Monitor Operation on page 5-51.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use acloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brush later, if youneed to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

5-55

When It Is Time for New TiresVarious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditionsinfluence when you need new tires.

One way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need new tires if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage thatcannot be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they arenot being used. This is also true for the spare tire, ifyour vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fastthis aging takes place, including temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Withproper care and maintenance tires will typically wear outbefore they degrade due to age. If you are unsureabout the need to replace your tires as they get older,consult the tire manufacturer for more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires for yourvehicle. The original equipment tires installed onyour vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meetGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed to give thesame performance and vehicle safety, during normaluse, as the original tires.

5-56

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling, traction control, and tirepressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mudand snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-43for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This isbecause uniform tread depth on all tires will helpkeep your vehicle performing most like it did when thetires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handling performance of yourvehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-54for information on proper tire rotation.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)the vehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types may also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and type of tires on yourvehicle’s wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are thesame size, load range, speed rating, and constructiontype (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’soriginal tires.

5-57

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressurewarning that is higher or lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-50.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading Information label. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-22, for more information aboutthe Tire and Loading Information label and its locationon your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different size thanyour original equipment wheels and tires, this may affectthe way your vehicle performs, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics, stability, and resistance torollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, andstability control, the performance of these systems can beaffected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle maynot provide an acceptable level of performance andsafety if tires not recommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increase the chance that youwill crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturnspecific wheel and tire systems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properly installed by aSaturn certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-56 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

5-58

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),which grades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary use sparetires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

5-59

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

{WARNING:

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

{WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing willnot be necessary on a regular basis. However, ifyou notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling toone side or the other, the alignment might need tobe checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailerfor proper diagnosis.

5-60

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminumwheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. Itcould affect the braking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturnoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance tothe body and chassis.

5-61

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use acloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brush later, if youneed to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads ofthe wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts mightcome loose and the wheel could fall off, causing acrash.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheelnuts can cause the wheel to become loose andeven come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sureto use the correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new Saturn originalequipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification.

5-62

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it has beenused or how far it has been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new Saturn originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle withoutthe proper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. Ifyou do find traction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

5-63

If a Tire Goes FlatYour vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit. SeeTire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-65.There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment, andno place to store a tire.

It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. SeeTires on page 5-42. If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But, if you shouldever have a blow out, here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much likea skid and may require the same correction youwould use in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the way you want the vehicleto go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the roadif possible.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Thendo this:

1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 3-6.

2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park). See Shifting Into Parkon page 2-30.

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel, hasdamaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a1⁄4 inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for thetire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

If the tire has a puncture less than a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) inthe tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 5-65.

5-64

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit

{CAUTION:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poorventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness and even death.Never run the engine in an enclosed area that hasno fresh air ventilation. For more information, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-33.

{CAUTION:

Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to ruptureand you or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the tire sealant and compressor kitinstructions and inflate the tire to its recommendedpressure. Do not exceed the recommendedpressure.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit orother equipment in the passenger compartment ofthe vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may not be a place tostore a tire.

The tire sealant and compressor can be used totemporarily seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in thetread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflatean under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel, hasdamaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is tooseverely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kitto be effective. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-7.

5-65

Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressorkit instructions.

The kit includes:

A. Air CompressorB. Tire Sealant

CanisterC. Power PlugD. On/Off Button

E. Pressure GageF. Air Only Hose

(Black)G. Sealant/Air Hose

(Clear)

Tire SealantRead and follow the safe handling instructions on thelabel adhered to the sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealantcanister. The sealant canister should be replaced beforeits expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. Afterusage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister” following.

5-66

Using the Tire Sealant and CompressorKit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit duringcold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environmentfor 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 5-64. Do not remove any objects that havepenetrated the tire.1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its

storage location. See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit Storage on page 5-73.Make sure the on/off button (D) is in the off (O)position.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the powerplug (C).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close tothe ground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire byturning it counterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valvestem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory poweroutlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-18.If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do notuse the cigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door orwindow.

5-67

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running whileusing the air compressor.

8. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit on.The compressor will inject sealant and air intothe tire.The pressure gage (E) will initially show a highpressure while the compressor pushes the sealantinto the tire. Once the sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly dropand start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.

9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (E). The recommendedinflation pressure can be found on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-48.The pressure gage (E) may read higher than theactual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor may be turned on/off untilthe correct pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot bereached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicleshould not be driven farther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant and compressor kitcannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflatinghose from the tire valve. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-7.

10. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit off.The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak airuntil the vehicle is driven and the sealant isdistributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 11 through17 must be done immediately after Step 10.Be careful while handling the tire sealant andcompressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

11. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessorypower outlet in the vehicle.

12. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise toremove it from the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the powerplug (C) back in their original location.

5-68

15. If the flat tire wasable to inflate to therecommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed labelfrom the sealantcanister (B) and placeit in a highly visiblelocation.

The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repairedor replaced.

16. Return the equipment to its original storage locationin the vehicle.

17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) todistribute the sealant in the tire.

18. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the TireSealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant toInflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.If the tire pressure has not dropped more than10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflationpressure, inflate the tire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or vehicle.

20. Dispose of the used sealant canister (B) andsealant/air hose (F) assembly at a localdealer/retailer or in accordance with local statecodes and practices.

21. Replace it with a new canister available from yourdealer/retailer.

22. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealantand compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorizeddealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of drivingto have the tire repaired or replaced.

5-69

Using the Tire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air onlyand not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 5-64.

1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from itsstorage location. See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit Storage on page 5-73.

2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B) by pulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B).

4. Remove the power plug (C) from the aircompressor (A).

5. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close tothe ground so the hose will reach it.

6. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stemand press the lever down to secure it.

5-70

8. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory poweroutlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-18.If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do notuse the cigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door orwindow.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running whileusing the air compressor.

10. Press the on/off (D) button to turn thecompressor on.The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (E). The recommendedinflation pressure can be found on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-48.

The pressure gage (E) may read higher than theactual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turned on/off untilthe correct pressure is reached.

12. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit off.Be careful while handling the tire sealant andcompressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

13. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessorypower outlet in the vehicle.

14. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valvestem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the air only hose (F) and the powerplug (C) back in its original location.

16. Place the equipment in the original storage locationin the vehicle.

5-71

Removal and Installation of the SealantCanisterTo remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B) by pulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from thecompressor (A).

4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the inflator fillinghose is aligned with the slot in the compressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from the compressorand replace with a new sealant canister. See yourdealer/retailer for more information.

5-72

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (F) with the slot in the aircompressor.

2. Push the sealant canister (B) down and turn itclockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its original location.

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose (F) onto thesealant canister inlet and push the lever down.

Tire Sealant and Compressor KitStorageThe tire sealant and compressor kit is located in thetrunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.

2. Lift the cover.

3. Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tiresealant and compressor kit.

To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse thesteps.

5-73

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it iscleaned often. Although not always visible, dust anddirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended to remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interiormay experience extremes of heat that could causestains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to home furnishings may alsotransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors from the vehicle’supholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with acleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damagethe interior and does not improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

5-74

• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residue that streaks andattracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Useonly mild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. thatcan damage the vehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may onlybe used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. Forany soil, always try to remove it first with plain water orclub soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as muchof the soil as possible using one of the followingtechniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner orspot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test asmall hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locallycleaned area gives any impression that a ring formationmay result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

5-75

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never usespot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearance and feel of theinterior and are not recommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on theinstrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severelyweaken them. In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-76

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that candamage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.Check the cleaning product label. If it states thatit should not be used on plastic parts, do not use iton the vehicle or damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a carwashing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, asthey can damage the paint, metal or plastic on thevehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after toremove all cleaning agents completely. If they areallowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter thevehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use ofpower washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) canresult in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-77.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from the paintfinish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on the vehicle.

5-77

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. To help keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garaged or covered wheneverpossible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, chrome polish may be used onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and abuildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may causewiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

5-78

Aluminum WheelsNotice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim maybe damaged if the vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chromewith soap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasivepolishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairswould not be covered by the warranty. Useonly approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because the surface could be damaged. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes, could damage the aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle may damage the paint finishand/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, alwayswipe off any overspray from all painted surfaceson the vehicle.

5-79

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the vehiclewarranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer/retailer. Largerareas of finish damage can be corrected in yourdealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-80

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side. It can be seen through the windshieldfrom outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels andthe certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. Thiscode helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-92 foryour vehicle’s engine code.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box. It isvery helpful if you ever need to order parts. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

5-81

Electrical System

Intermediate Voltage Devices andWiring

{CAUTION:

Exposure to intermediate voltage can cause shockand burns. The intermediate voltage systems inthe vehicle can only be serviced by technicianswith special training.

Intermediate voltage devices are identified bylabels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modifythese devices. Intermediate voltage cable or wiringhas blue covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut,or modify intermediate voltage cable or wiring.

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to thevehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damagethe vehicle and the damage would not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even ifthe vehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to the vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by an internalcircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due toheavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motorcools. If the overload is caused by some electricalproblem, have it fixed.

5-82

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsFuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opensprotecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakersand fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance ofdamage caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure toreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in thecenter of the instrument panel, one in the enginecompartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panelfuse block. It can be used to easily remove fusesfrom the fuse block.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panel fuse block is located on thepassenger side of the vehicle, on the lower portion ofthe instrument panel near the floor.

Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, thenremove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.

5-83

Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and features listed.

5-84

Fuses UsagePOWER

MIRRORS Power Mirrors

EPS Electronic Power Steering

RUN/CRANK Cruise Control Switch, PassengerAirbag Status Indicator

HVACBLOWER HIGH

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningBlower - High Speed Relay

CLUSTER/THEFT

Instrument Panel Cluster, TheftDeterrent System

ONSTAR OnStar®

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)

HVACCTRL (BATT)

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningControl Diagnostic Link Connector(Battery)

PEDAL Not Used

Fuses UsageWIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

IGN SENSOR Ignition SwitchSTRG WHL

ILLUM Steering Wheel Illumination


RADIO Audio SystemINTERIOR

LIGHTS Interior Lamps


POWERWINDOWS Power Windows

HVACCTRL (IGN)

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningControl (Ignition)

HVACBLOWER

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningBlower Switch

DOOR LOCK Door Locks

5-85

Fuses UsageROOF/HEAT

SEAT Sunroof, Heated Seat



AIRBAG(BATT) Airbag (Battery)

SPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare Fuse Holder




FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located on thedriver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.

The vehicle might not have all the fuses and featureslisted.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical componentson the vehicle may damage it. Always keep thecovers on any electrical component.

5-86

Fuses Usage1 Air Conditioner Clutch2 Electronic Throttle Control3 Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) IGN

Fuses Usage

4 Transmission, Transmission ControlModule Ignition 1

5 Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) Pumps

5-87

Fuses Usage6 Emission7 Left Headlamp Low-Beam8 Horn9 Right Headlamp Low-Beam

11 Left Headlamp High-Beam12 Right Headlamp High-Beam13 Engine Control Module BATT14 Windshield Wiper

15 Antilock Brake System (ABS)(IGN 1)

16 Engine Control Module (IGN 1)17 Cooling Fan 118 Cooling Fan 2

19 Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning Blower

20 Body Control Module 121 Body Control Module Run/Crank22 Rear Electrical Center 123 Rear Electrical Center 224 Antilock Brake System (ABS)25 Body Control Module 2

Fuses Usage26 Starter41 Electric Power Steering

42 Transmission Control ModuleBattery

43 Ignition Module44 Injectors46 Daytime Running Lamps47 Center High-Mounted Stoplamps50 Driver Power Window51 Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) BATT52 Transmission Pump Motor54 Battery Voltage Sense55 Antilock Brake System (Battery)

Relays Usage28 Cooling Fan 129 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel30 Cooling Fan 231 Starter32 Run/Crank, Ignition33 Powertrain

5-88

Relays Usage34 Air Conditioning Clutch35 High-Beam Headlamp37 Horn38 Low-Beam Headlamp39 Windshield Wiper 140 Windshield Wiper 248 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)49 Stoplamps53 Transmission Pump Motor

Diodes Usage27 Wiper

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunkof the vehicle. Access the fuse block through thetrunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.

5-89

Fuses Usage1 Passenger Seat Controls2 Driver Seat Controls3 Not Used4 Not Used

Fuses Usage5 Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid

6 Park Lamps, Instrument PanelDimming

7 Not Used

5-90

Fuses Usage8 Not Used9 Not Used

10 Sunroof Controls11 Not Used12 Not Used13 Audio Amplifier14 Heated Seat Controls15 Not Used

16Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System, XM™ SatelliteRadio, UGDO

17 Back-up Lamps18 Not Used19 Not Used20 Auxiliary Power Outlets21 Not Used22 Trunk Release23 Rear Defog

Fuses Usage24 Heated Mirrors25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage26 Rear Window Defogger27 Park Lamps28 Not Used29 Not Used30 Not Used31 Not Used32 Not Used33 Back-up Lamps34 Not Used35 Not Used36 Trunk Release37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp

5-91

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Cooling System 8.1 qt 7.7 L

Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal) 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Fuel Tank 16.3 gal 61.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 5 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

5-92

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14Maintenance Record .....................................6-15

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts, and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep thevehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affectthe quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels orthe wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and tokeep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintainthe vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you will driveit. You might drive very short distances only a few times aweek. Or you might drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle inmaking deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to doerrands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits on the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-6.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

6-2

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can bedangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can beseriously injured. Do your own maintenance workonly if you have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. If you haveany doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unlessyou are technically qualified and have the necessaryequipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine parts.

To purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-15.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells whatshould be checked, when to check it, and what can easilybe done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make surethese are used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

6-3

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), service is required forthe vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if driving under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However, the engineoil and filter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service technicians who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last service. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-18 for information on the EngineOil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that the first service be Maintenance I,the second service be Maintenance II, and thenalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II might berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the messagedisplays within 10 months since the vehicle waspurchased or Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message displays10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-54 and At Least Once a Month on page 6-9. • •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Inspect underbody 36-volt batterysystem cable. See footnote (l). • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service only).See footnote (h).

• • •

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plugwires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (m).

• • •

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect electric power steering cablesfor proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts asneeded. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure testof the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, ifcontaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-41 and Windshield and Wiper Blades onpage 5-78 for more information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safetybelt assemblies are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If yousee anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn orfrayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checkingthe Restraint Systems on page 1-72.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges andlatches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hingesand latches. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

(g) Check system for interference or binding and fordamaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.Replace any components that have high effort orexcessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruisecontrol cables.

6-7

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If the vehicle is not used under any of these conditions,the fluid and filter do not require changing.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service canbe complex; you should have your dealer/retailer performthis service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what touse. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system andpressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired andthe fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect underbody 36-volt battery systemcable for damage. Replace cable if necessary.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,dependability, and emission control performance. Yourdealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to thevehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure tokeep the engine oil at the proper level can causedamage to the engine not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.

6-8

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-23.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inspection and Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-48.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contact yourdealer/retailer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parked on alevel surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-29.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailerfor service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF onlywhen the shift lever is in P (Park).

• The ignition key should come out only inLOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

6-10

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle couldbegin to move. You or others could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and the transmissionin N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-11

Tire Sealant and Compressor KitCheck the sealant expiration date printed on theinstruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kitat least once a year. See your dealer/retailer for areplacement canister.

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM StandardGM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15.

EngineCoolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-23.

Usage Fluid/LubricantWindshield

Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

6-12

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part Part Numbers ACDelco Part NumbersEngine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627CEngine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457GSpark Plugs 12598004 41-103Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 23.6 in (60.0 cm) 25800624 —Passenger Side – 21.0 in (53.0 cm) 25800623 —

6-13

Engine Drive Belt Routing

The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is under ahigher tension than the engine drive belt on a non-hybridvehicle and requires the use of a special kind of toolto service. See your dealer/retailer for service.

6-14

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, andthe type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-16




6-17




6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-5Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ........................................................7-6Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-9Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..........................7-14Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-14Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ..................7-14Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16Event Data Recorders ...................................7-16OnStar® ......................................................7-17Navigation System ........................................7-17Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-17

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committedto providing our customers with unparalleled service,before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturnvehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this theSaturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with thesales transaction or the operation of the vehicleare resolved by the retailer’s sales or servicedepartments. If, for any reason, your ownershipexperience falls below your expectations, we suggestyou take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer AssistanceLiaison. Any member of the retail management team hasthe authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,in the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada,

call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance Centerteam member will handle your call and assist inproviding product and warranty information, the nearestretailer location, roadside assistance, brochures,literature and discuss any concerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digitnumber can be found on the vehicle registrationor title, on the upper driver side corner of theinstrument panel, or on your roadside assistancekey card.

• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

When contacting Saturn, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first.

7-2

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and itsretailers are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfied after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturnand its retailers offer the additional assistance of aneutral party through our voluntary participation in amediation/arbitration program called Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. This program is available at no costto you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior to filing a courtaction, use of the program is free of charge and yourcase is generally heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you canreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using thetoll-free telephone number or by writing them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100Dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicleage, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporationreserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in this program.

7-3

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration ProgramIn the event that you do not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaint to thefinal decision, should be completed in approximately70 days. We believe our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in most jurisdictions because itis informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you maycall the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN).

7-4

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/saturnInformation and services customized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warranty information,and more

• Online service and maintenance records

• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specific vehicle

• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earningssummaries

Other Helpful Links:Saturn − www.saturn.com

Saturn Merchandise — www.saturncollection.com

Help Center — www.saturn.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.caMy GM Canada is a password-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can save information onGM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services youwill have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as addressand phone number for each of your preferredGM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts andservice estimates, check trade-in values, orschedule a service appointment by adding thevehicles you own to your driveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use toolsand forms with greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section withinwww.gm.ca.

7-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturnhas installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devicesfor the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn CustomerAssistance Center.

Any hearing or speech-impaired customer who hasaccess to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesSaturn encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a customer wishes to writeto Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

GMcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver or passenger adaptive equipment you mayrequire for your vehicle such as hand controls,wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limited period of time fromthe date of vehicle purchase/lease.

7-6

For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the SaturnCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call the Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users inCanada may call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-553-6000;(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance, have the followinginformation ready:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of thevehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles(160 000 km), whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. InCanada, a person driving the vehicle without permissionfrom the owner is not covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program at anytime without notification.

Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reservethe right to limit services or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is made many times.

7-7

Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel

for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock thevehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must present identificationbefore this service is given.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannotbe driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change aflat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition and properly inflated.It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jumpstart a dead battery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If yourtrip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrainwarranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehicles driven on anon-public road or highway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately

$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and other fuels are not providedthrough this service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of NorthAmerica are provided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or the most scenicroute. There is a limit of six requests per year.Additional travel information is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

7-8

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Mustbe over 250 kilometres from where your trip wasstarted to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization, original detailedreceipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help you make arrangementsand explain how to receive payment.

• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot beprovided right away, the Roadside Assistanceadvisor may give you permission to get localemergency road service. You will receive payment,up to $100, after sending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for parts and laborfor repairs not covered by the warranty arethe owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, contactyour dealer/retailer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advising yourservice consultant of your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle forservice, you are urged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for the same day repair.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we and ourparticipating retailers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program for vehicleswith the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada), extended powertrain, and hybridspecific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportation options are available toassist in reducing your inconvenience when warrantyrepairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information” furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

7-9

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helpsto minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your retailer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you withshuttle service to get you to your destination withminimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of the retailer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, andpublic transportation is used instead of the retailer’sshuttle service, the expense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be up to the maximumamount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.

Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts. See your retailer forinformation regarding the allowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle thatyou obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnightwarranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by original receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

7-10

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, may not beavailable at every retailer. Please contact your retailerfor specific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate retailer personnel.

Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, changeor discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any timeand to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairsdiminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts made withthe same materials and construction methods asthe parts with which your vehicle was originally built.

Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice toensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved. The use ofGenuine GM parts can help maintain your GM NewVehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used forrepair. These parts are typically removed from vehiclesthat were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts is notknown. Such parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failuresare not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to such partsare not covered by that warranty.

7-11

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose a collision repairfacility that meets your needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be able to recommenda collision repair center that has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in the quality of coverageafforded by various insurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reduced protection to yourGM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairsby using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend thatyou assure your vehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts. If such insurancecoverage is not available from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged atthe end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you areuninjured, make sure that no one else in yourvehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency servicesfor help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger or youare instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested informationto police and other parties involved in the crash.Do not discuss your personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.This will help guard against post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-7 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where thetowing service will be taking it. Get a card fromthe tow truck operator or write down the driver’sname, the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it istowed away. Make sure this includes your insuranceinformation and registration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

7-12

• Gather the important information you will need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address, phonenumber, driver’s license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, model and model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), insurance companyand policy number, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from thescene of the crash. They will walk you throughthe information they will need. If they ask fora police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and you canget a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for yourvehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or aprivate collision repair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully andmake sure you understand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcomethis opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,GM recommends that you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by yourGM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must livewith the repair. Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired with GenuineGM parts, even if your insurance coverage does notpay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying for therepairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits withthat company. In such cases, you can have control ofthe repair and parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

7-13

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it couldopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it couldorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your retailer or SaturnCorporation.

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to Safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from Safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7-14

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsA variety of publications are available to you. Saturnservice manuals are written for trained technicians, andin some cases, specialized tools and equipment arenecessary to complete certain repairs. However, themanuals are available to owners who either have thetraining, or wish to gain a greater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications information or to orderpublications in the United States, call toll free1-800-2-SATURN or visit Saturn-publications.com toorder on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available bycalling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtain product bulletins and asdescribed below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. statesand the District of Columbia, and only for cars and lighttrucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) lessthan 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individualbulletins are also at your participating Saturn retailer.You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating to product servicebulletins can be obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailers useful servicebulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors productperformance in the field. We then prepare bulletins forservicing our products better. You can get thesebulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to theproper use and care of your vehicle. Some describecostly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairswhich, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoidfuture costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new orunexpected condition. Others describe a quickerway to fix your vehicle. They can help a technicianservice your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a smallnumber of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualifiedtechnician may have to determine if a specific bulletinapplies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visitsaturn-publications.com to order online.

7-15

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyYour Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven. For example,your vehicle uses computer modules to monitorand control engine and transmission performance,to monitor the conditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,to provide antilock braking to help the driver controlthe vehicle. These modules may store data to helpyour dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.Some modules may also store data about howyou operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. These modulesmay also retain the owner’s personal preferences,such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record data relatedto vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR inthis vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety

belts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

7-16

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment isrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

Saturn will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, ifthe vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of Saturn’s defense oflitigation through the discovery process; or, as requiredby law. Data that Saturn collects or receives mayalso be used for Saturn research needs or may be madeavailable to others for research purposes, where aneed is shown and the data is not tied to a specificvehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to theOnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on data collection anduse. See also OnStar® System on page 2-36 in thismanual for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, and other tripinformation. Refer to the navigation system operatingmanual for information on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functionssuch as tire pressure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does notuse or record personal information or link with any otherSaturn system containing personal information.

7-17

✍ NOTES

7-18

AAccessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-71Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-82Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-29Readiness Light .......................................... 3-28

Airbag System ................................................ 1-56Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ................................................... 1-71How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-63Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-65Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-70What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-63What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-64When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-61Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-58

Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-85Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 3-85Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-31Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-79Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-76

Appearance Care (cont.)Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-80Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-77Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-75Finish Care ................................................. 5-77Finish Damage ............................................ 5-80Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................. 5-76Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-74Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-80Tires .......................................................... 5-79Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-80Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-77Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-76Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-78

Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-9Audio System ................................................. 3-54

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-82Backglass Antenna ...................................... 3-85Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-85Radio Reception .......................................... 3-84Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-55Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-82XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-85

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-56Auto Stop Mode ............................................. 3-39Automatic Climate Control System ..................... 3-19Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15

1

Automatic TransmissionFluid .......................................................... 5-22Operation ................................................... 2-27

BBackglass Antenna .......................................... 3-85Battery .......................................................... 5-32

Electric Power Management .......................... 3-16Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-17

Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-72Brake

Emergencies ................................................ 4-5Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-31Brakes .......................................................... 5-31

Regenerative Braking ................................... 2-30System Warning Light .................................. 3-30

Braking ........................................................... 4-4Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-38

Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-38Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-37License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-40Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-40Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ................. 5-38Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-56

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-6California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications ............................ 5-92Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-12, 2-33, 4-19Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-76CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-65Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-40Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-63Charge/Assist Gage ........................................ 3-39Charging System Light .................................... 3-30Check

Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-34Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-80Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-38Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-34Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-42Older Children ............................................. 1-30Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position .................................................. 1-49Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ........................................... 1-52Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40

Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-85

2

CleaningAluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-79Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-77Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-75Finish Care ................................................. 5-77Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................. 5-76Interior ....................................................... 5-74Tires .......................................................... 5-79Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-80Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-77Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-76Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-78

Climate Control SystemAutomatic ................................................... 3-19Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24

Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-55Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11Compressor Kit

Storing ....................................................... 5-73Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ............................ 5-65Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-17Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3Convenience Net ............................................ 2-40Coolant

Engine ....................................................... 5-23Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-33Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27

Cooling System .............................................. 5-22Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10

Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-37Cupholders .................................................... 2-39Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ....................................................... 7-6Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ................ 7-14Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-14Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................... 7-14Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-7Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15

DDaytime Running Lamp ................................... 3-14Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-14Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-65Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-16Door

Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10Door Ajar Reminder ....................................... 2-9

3

Door (cont.)Locks .......................................................... 2-9Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-40DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-41DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-48DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-44

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-15Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-17Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-3Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-17Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-18In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-16Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-22Winter ........................................................ 4-19

Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2

EEDR ............................................................. 7-16Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-82Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-86Fuses ........................................................ 5-83

Electrical System (cont.)Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-83Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-83Rear Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 5-89Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-82

Electronic ImmobilizerPASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-19

Electronic Immobilizer OperationPASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-19

Electronic Stability Control ................................. 4-6Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ........... 3-32Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-34Coolant ...................................................... 5-23Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-26Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-33Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-14Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33Oil ............................................................. 5-15Oil Life System ........................................... 5-18Overheating ................................................ 5-28Starting ...................................................... 2-22

Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-16Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-16Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30

4

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20Finish Damage ............................................... 5-80Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-64Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-22Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-30

Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-9Fuel ............................................................... 5-6

Additives ...................................................... 5-7California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Driving for Better Economy ............................. 4-2Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-11Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-8Gage ......................................................... 3-38Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-6Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6

Fuel Economy Light ........................................ 3-40Fuses ........................................................... 5-83

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-86Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-83Rear Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 5-89Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-82

GGage

Fuel .......................................................... 3-38Speedometer .............................................. 3-26Tachometer ................................................. 3-26

Gage, Charge/Assist ........................................ 3-39Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-6Specifications ............................................... 5-6

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-39GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-8Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-37Headlamps .................................................... 3-13

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-38Daytime Running Lamp ................................ 3-14Delayed ..................................................... 3-14Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-38High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8On Reminder .............................................. 3-13

5

Headlamps Off in Park .................................... 3-14Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4Heater ........................................................... 3-19

Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-26Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-37High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-49Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-17Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-18Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-12Release ..................................................... 5-12

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-21Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-48Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-65Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-15Cluster ....................................................... 3-25Overview ..................................................... 3-4

Intermediate Voltage Devices and Wiring ............ 5-82

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-33

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-43Lamp

Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-34Lamps

Dome ........................................................ 3-16Reading ..................................................... 3-16Trunk ......................................................... 3-16

Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-24LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-42License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-40Lift Seat, Power ............................................... 1-9Light

Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-28Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-31

6

Light (cont.)Brake System Warning ................................. 3-30Charging System ......................................... 3-30Cruise Control ............................................. 3-37Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-33Fuel Economy ............................................. 3-40Highbeam On ............................................. 3-37Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-36Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-29Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-27Security ..................................................... 3-37Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-33

Light, Auto Stop Mode ..................................... 3-39Lighting

Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-16Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-16

Lights ............................................................ 3-13Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8On Reminder .............................................. 3-13

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-22Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12Locks

Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10Door ........................................................... 2-9Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12Power Door .................................................. 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10

Locks (cont.)Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-42Lumbar

Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-34Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-44

7

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-35Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-36Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-35

MP3 ............................................................. 3-65MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5

NNavigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-17New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-26Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-26Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-15Pressure Light ............................................. 3-36

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-18Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-30Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-17OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-36Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24Outlets

Accessory Power ......................................... 3-18

OutsideAutomatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-36Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-35

Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPaint, Damage ............................................... 5-80Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-16Park

Headlamps Off in Park ................................. 3-14Shifting Into ................................................ 2-30Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32

Park Brake .................................................... 2-29Parking

Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-29Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-65Passing ......................................................... 4-13PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-19PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation ... 2-19Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4Phone

Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-72Power

Door Locks .................................................. 2-9Electrical System ......................................... 5-83Lift Seat ....................................................... 1-9

8

Power (cont.)Retained Accessory ..................................... 2-22Seat ............................................................ 1-3Windows .................................................... 2-15

Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-27Privacy .......................................................... 7-16

Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-16Navigation System ....................................... 7-17OnStar ....................................................... 7-17Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-17

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-17Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-56Radios

Reception ................................................... 3-84Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-55Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-82

Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-16Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-35Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-28Regenerative Braking ...................................... 2-30Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ... 2-4

Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-40Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-14Saturn ....................................................... 7-14United States Government ............................ 7-14

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-72Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash ..................................................... 1-73Retained Accessory Power ............................... 2-22Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-7Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-22Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-34

SSafety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-27Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-76How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-24Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-29Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-11

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii

9

Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seats

Head Restraints ............................................ 1-8Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4Power Lift Seat ............................................. 1-9Power Seats ................................................. 1-3Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-9

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ...................................... 1-49Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-52

Security Light ................................................. 3-37Service ........................................................... 5-3

Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of the

Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ... 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-34Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15

Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-70Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-55Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-80Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-30Shifting Out of Park ........................................ 2-32Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-92

Speedometer .................................................. 3-26Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-9Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-22Steering ........................................................ 4-11Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-82Steering Wheel, Tilt and Telescopic ..................... 3-6Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-40Convenience Net ......................................... 2-40Cupholders ................................................. 2-39Glove Box .................................................. 2-39

Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 5-73Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-21Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17Sunroof ......................................................... 2-40

TTachometer .................................................... 3-26Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps ....................................... 5-38

Telescopic Wheel .............................................. 3-6Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-82Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-17PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-19

10

Theft-Deterrent Systems (cont.)PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation ................................................ 2-19Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Time, Setting .................................................. 3-55Tire

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-33Tire Sealant

Storing ....................................................... 5-73Tires ............................................................. 5-42

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-79Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-56Chains ....................................................... 5-63Cleaning .................................................... 5-79Different Size .............................................. 5-58High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-49If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-64Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-48Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-54Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-51Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-50Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ................... 5-65Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-43Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-45Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-59Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-60Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-61When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-56

TowingRecreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-28Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-31Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-28

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-8

Traction Control System ................................... 3-32Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-27Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-26Trunk ............................................................ 2-12Trunk Lamps .................................................. 3-16Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

UUniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-59

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-3Loading ...................................................... 4-22Running While Parked .................................. 2-34Symbols ......................................................... iv

11

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-81Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-81

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC ........................................................... 3-48

Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-24Visors ........................................................... 2-17

WWarning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-24Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-44Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-60Different Size .............................................. 5-58Replacement ............................................... 5-61

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40Windows ....................................................... 2-14

Power ........................................................ 2-15Windshield

Washer ........................................................ 3-9Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-30Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-41Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-78Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-82Wipers ......................................................... 3-8

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-19

XXM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-71XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-85

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

12

2009 saturn aura green line hybrid owner …...this manual includes the latest information at the...

Documents